Contents

BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 264
1 of 264

Summary of Content for BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual PDF

Owner's Manual for Vehicle

The Ultimate Driving Machine

650i Owner's Manual for Vehicle Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.

Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore have this request:

Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize yourself with the information that we have compiled for you before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical fea- tures. The manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to main- taining the value of your BMW throughout an extended service life.

This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa- tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.

BMW AG

2007 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. Order No. 01 41 0 014 242 US English VIII/07, 07 09 500 Printed in Germany Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Contents

The fastest way to find specific topics is to use the index, refer to page 242.

Using this Owner's Manual 4 Notes 7 Reporting safety defects

At a glance 10 Cockpit 16 iDrive 23 Voice command system

Controls 28 Opening and closing 47 Adjusting 56 Transporting children safely 58 Driving 74 Everything under control 85 Technology for comfort, convenience

and safety 102 Lamps 108 Climate 115 Practical interior accessories

Driving tips 124 Things to remember when driving

Navigation 132 Starting navigation system 134 Destination entry 146 Destination guidance 155 What to do if

Entertainment 158 On/off and tone 162 Radio 169 Satellite radio 172 CD player and CD changer 178 AUX-In connection 179 USB/audio interface

Communications 184 Telephoning 199 BMW Assist

Mobility 208 Refueling 210 Wheels and tires 216 Under the hood 221 Maintenance 223 Replacing components 227 Giving and receiving assistance

Reference 234 Technical data 238 Short commands of voice command

system 242 Everything from A to Z

N o

te s

4

Notes

Using this Owner's Manual We have made every effort to ensure that you are able to find what you need in this Owner's Manual as quickly as possible. The fastest way to find specific topics is to use the detailed index at the back of the manual. If you wish to gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will find this in the first chapter.

Should you want to sell your BMW some day, please remember to pass on the Owner's Man- ual as well; it is an important component of your vehicle.

Additional sources of information Should you have any other questions, your BMW center will be happy to advise you.

You can find information on BMW, e.g. technol- ogy, on the Internet at www.bmwusa.com.

Symbols used Indicates precautions that must be fol- lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-

sibility of personal injury and serious damage to the vehicle.<

Indicates information that will assist you in gaining the optimum benefit from your

vehicle and enable you to care more effectively for your vehicle.<

Refers to measures that can be taken to help protect the environment.<

< Marks the end of a specific item of informa- tion.

* Indicates special equipment, country-spe- cific equipment and optional extras, as well as equipment and functions not yet available at the time of printing.

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions.

{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice command system.

{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the voice command system.

Symbols on vehicle components Indicates that you should consult the rel- evant section of this Owner's Manual for

information on a particular part or assembly.

5

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The individual vehicle When purchasing your BMW, you have decided in favor of a model with individualized equip- ment and features. This Owner's Manual describes all models and equipment offered by BMW within the same line.

Please bear in mind that the manual may con- tain information on accessories and equipment that you have not specified for your own vehicle. Sections describing options and special equip- ment are marked by asterisks * to assist you in identifying possible differences between the descriptions in this manual and your own vehi- cle's equipment.

If equipment in your BMW is not described in this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom- panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.

Editorial notice BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards combined with advanced, state-of-the-art technology. In iso- lated cases it is possible that the features described in this Owner's Manual could differ from those on your vehicle.

N o

te s

6

For your own safety

Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, e.g. the use of modern materials and high-performance

electronics, requires specially adapted mainte- nance and repair methods. Have corresponding work on your BMW performed only by your BMW center or a workshop that works accord- ing to BMW repair procedures with appropri- ately trained personnel. If this work is not car- ried out properly, there is a danger of subsequent damage and related safety haz- ards.<

California Proposition 65 Warning California law requires us to issue the following warning:

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts,

including components found in the interior fur- nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and related accesso- ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.<

Parts and accessories For your own safety, use genuine parts and accessories approved by BMW.

When you purchase accessories tested and approved by BMW and Genuine BMW Parts, you simultaneously acquire the assurance that they have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure optimum performance when installed on your vehicle. BMW warrants these parts to be free from defects in material and workmanship. BMW will not accept any liability for damage resulting from installation of parts and accesso- ries not approved by BMW. BMW cannot test every product made by other manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi- cle, its operation, or its occupants. Genuine BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and other products approved by BMW, together with professional advice on using these items, are available from all BMW centers. Installation and operation of non-BMW approved accessories such as alarms, radios, amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension components, brake dust shields, telephones, including operation of any mobile phone from within the vehicle without using an externally mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radios or similar accessories, may cause extensive dam- age to the vehicle, compromise its safety, inter- fere with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your BMW center for additional information.<

Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and sys-

tems may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any cer- tified automotive part.<

7

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly.

Your BMW is covered by the following warran- ties:

> New Vehicle Limited Warranty

> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty

> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty

> California Emission Control System Limited Warranty

Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.

Reporting safety defects

For US customers The following applies only to vehicles owned and operated in the US.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone (800) 831- 1117.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you and your dealer or BMW of North America, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis- trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov

For Canadian customers Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call 1-800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in Canada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa region and from other countries, or contact Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville, Tower C, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca

At a glance This overview of buttons, switches and displays is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's

operating environment. The section will also assist you in becoming acquainted with the

control concepts and options available for operating the various systems.

C o

ck p

it

10

Cockpit

Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

1 Convertible: opening and closing rear window 39

2 Convertible: opening and closing windows together 39

3 Convertible: opening and closing rear windows 39

4 Opening and closing front windows 38

5 Exterior mirrors, folding in and out 53

6 Adjusting exterior mirrors 53 Automatic curb monitor 54

7 Turn signals 63

High beams, headlamp flasher 104

High-beam assistant* 104

Roadside parking lamps 104

Check Control 79

Computer 75

A t

a g

la n

ce

11

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

8 Buttons on steering wheel

9 Instrument cluster 12

12 Ignition lock 58

13 Horn, entire surface

16 Releasing hood 216

Mobile phone* 184

> Press: accepting and ending call, starting dialing* for selected phone number and redialing if no phone number is selected

> Press and hold: redialing

Volume

Activating/deactivating voice command system* 23

Changing radio station 162 Selecting music track 173 Scrolling in phone book and in lists with stored phone numbers

Individually programmable* 55

Individually programmable 55

Leaving lane warning* 101

10 Windshield wipers 64

Rain sensor 64

11 Starting/stopping engine and switching ignition on/off 58

14 Steering wheel heater* 54

Steering wheel adjustment 54

15 Cruise control* 65

Active cruise control 66

17 Opening luggage compartment lid 34

18 Head-Up Display* 96

BMW Night Vision* 98

19 Parking lamps 102

Low beams 102 Welcome lamps 102 Automatic headlamp control 102 Daytime running lamps* 103 Welcome lamps 102 Adaptive Head Light* 104

20 Instrument lighting 106

Fog lamps 106

C o

ck p

it

12

Instrument cluster

1 Indicator lamps for turn signals

2 Speedometer

3 Indicator and warning lamps 13

4 Displays for

> Active cruise control* 66

> Leaving lane warning* 101

5 Tachometer 74

6 Engine oil temperature* 75

7 Display for

> Time/date 74

> Outside temperature 74

> Indicator and warning lamps 79

> Speed for cruise control 66

> Desired speed for active cruise control* 70

8 Display for

> Odometer and trip odometer 74

> Computer 75

> Date and remaining travel distance for service requirements 77

> Sport automatic transmission 60

> Dynamic Driving Control 62

> High-beam assistant* 104

> Check Control message present 79

9 Fuel gauge 75

10 Resetting trip odometer 74

A t

a g

la n

ce

13

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Indicator and warning lamps

The concept

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in different combinations and colors.

When the engine is started or the ignition is switched on, some lamps are checked for proper operation and light up briefly in the pro- cess.

Explanatory text messages

Text messages at the bottom edge of the Control Display explain the meaning of the displayed indicator and warning lamps.

You can consult Check Control for additional information, e.g. regarding the cause of a mal- function or the appropriate actions to take, refer to page 79.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp lights up.

Indicator lamps without text messages The following indicator lamps signal particular functions:

High beams/headlamp flasher 104

Fog lamps 106

Handbrake applied 60

Handbrake for Canadian models

Lamp flashes: DSC or DTC is controlling the drive and braking forces to maintain vehicle stability 87

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 88

Engine malfunction with deteriorating emissions levels 222

Engine malfunction with deteriorating emissions levels for Canadian models 222

C o

ck p

it

14

Around the center console: controls and displays

A t

a g

la n

ce

15

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

1 Coupe: glass sunroof, electric with raise function* 40

2 Coupe: microphone for hands-free mode for telephone* and voice command system* 23 Convertible: microphone on steering column

3 Reading lamps 107

4 Interior lamps 106

5 Coupe: initiating SOS emergency request 227

6 Indicator lampfor front passenger airbags 95

7 Convertible: initiating SOS emergency request* 227

8 Control Display 16

9 Hazard warning flashers

10 Central locking system 32

11 Automatic climate control 108

12 Changing

> radio station 163

> track 173

13 Ejecting

> navigation DVD* 132

> audio CD 173

14 Programmable memory/direct selection buttons 21

15 Drive for navigation DVD in Professional* navigation system 132

16 Drive for audio CDs 173

17 Entertainment sound output on/off and adjusting volume 159

19 Bracket for cup holder 118

20 Controller 16 Turn, press or move horizontally in four directions

21 Opening start menu on Control Display 17

22 Dynamic Driving Control 62

Temperature setting, left/right 108

Automatic air distribution and volume 109

Cooling function 111

AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 111

Recirculated-air mode 111

Maximum cooling 111

Residual heat mode 112

Switching off automatic climate control 112

Air volume 110

Defrosting windows and removing condensation 110

Rear window defroster 108

18 Heated seats* 53

PDC Park Distance Control* 85

DTC Dynamic Traction Control 88

Convertible: opening the convert- ible top 43

Convertible: closing the convertible top 43

iD ri

ve

16

iDrive

iDrive combines the functions of a multitude of switches. This allows these functions to be operated from a central position. The following section provides an introduction to basic menu

navigation. The control of individual functions is described in connection with the relevant equipment.

Controls

1 Control Display

2 button Opening the start menu

3 Controller You can use the controller to select menu items and change settings by:

> moving in four directions, arrows 4

> turning, arrow 5

> pressing, arrow 6

To avoid becoming distracted and unnec- essarily endangering both your own vehi-

cle's occupants and other road users, never attempt to use the controls or make entries unless traffic and road conditions allow.<

A t

a g

la n

ce

17

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Menu overview

Communication > Telephone* > BMW Assist* or TeleService*

Navigation or onboard information > Navigation system* > Onboard info, e.g. for displaying of the aver-

age fuel consumption

Entertainment > Radio

> CD player and CD changer*

Climate > Vent settings

> Automatic programs

> Parked car operation

menu > Switching off the Control Display

> Tone and display settings

> Settings for your vehicle, e.g. for the central locking system

> Display of maintenance intervals and dead- lines for legally mandated inspections

> Settings for the telephone

Basic operation From radio readiness, refer to page 58, the fol- lowing message is shown on the Control Dis- play:

To hide the message: Press the controller. This displays the start menu.

The message is automatically hidden after approx. 10 seconds.

Start menu

You can call up all the functions of iDrive using five menu items.

Opening start menu Press the button.

To open the start menu from the menu:

Press the button twice.

iD ri

ve

18

Opening menu items of start menu

From the start menu, you can call up the four menu items Communication, Navigation, Enter- tainment, and Climate by moving the controller left, right, forward, or back.

You can open the menu by pressing the con- troller.

Comfort opening of menu items Comfort opening offers you the option of:

> Opening a menu item of the start menu in the view last selected

> Direct changing between Communication, Navigation, Entertainment and Climate without pressing the button

To do so, move the controller in the corre- sponding direction and hold it for approx. 2 sec- onds.

Displays in menu

1 Each menu is divided into fields. The cur- rently selected field appears brighter.

2 A symbol indicates the last selected menu item of the start menu:

1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon- tal or vertical lists.

2 Arrows indicate the possibility of accessing other menu items that are not currently vis- ible.

3 Settings are displayed graphically or numerically.

Communication

Navigation or onboard info

Entertainment

Climate

menu

A t

a g

la n

ce

19

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Operating principle at a glance Basic operation via iDrive is described in this view.

You can view the individual steps under Settings on Control Display, Setting time, refer to page 82.

1 Selecting menu item:

> Turn controller; marking moves

> Menu items shown in white can be selected by marking

2 Activating a menu item:

> Press controller

> New menu items are displayed or function is carried out

3 Selecting a menu item: refer to 1

4 Changing between fields:

> Briefly move controller left, right, forward or back

> Release controller

> Active field appears lighter

5 Adjusting settings:

> Turn controller

> Graphic display, numerical value or text displays can be changed

> Confirmation by changing field

iD ri

ve

20

Status information

1 Display for:

> Entertainment: Radio, CD

> Telephone* in "Communication": Name of linked mobile phone, network search or no network

> "BMW Assist"*: Existing voice connection with a service from BMW Assist

2 Entertainment sound output off

3 Station that transmits traffic information is received*:

"TI": Traffic information for the navigation sys- temcan be received and transmission is switched on

4 Display for:

> New entries present in "Missed calls"* > Roaming active

5 Telephoning* is possible if the mobile phone is paired in the vehicle

Reception strength of mobile phone network, dependent on mobile phone

6 Time

Other displays: When Check Control information appears or entries are made via the voice command sys- tem*, the status information is temporarily hid- den.

Assistance window*

Additional information appears in the assis- tance window:

> the computer or the trip computer

> the arrow or map view with navigation system*

> the current position

Selecting display 1. Move the controller to the right to change to

the assistance window and press the con- troller.

2. Select a menu item.

3. Press the controller.

A t

a g

la n

ce

21

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Switching assistance window on/off 1. Move the controller to the right to change to

the assistance window and press the con- troller.

2. Select "Assist. window off" and press the controller.

To switch on, change to the assistance window and press the controller.

Switching Control Display on/off 1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Display off" and press the control- ler.

To switch on, press the controller.

Programmable memory/ direct selection buttons You can save and run certain functions of iDrive on the programmable memory/direct selection buttons:

> Destinations of navigation

> Telephone, phone numbers

> Entertainment:

> radio station

> CD

> CD compartment of CD changer* > AUX

The assignment of the programmable memory/ direct selection buttons is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Saving function

Destinations of navigation 1. Select navigation destination, e.g. in the

destination list or the address book.

2. Press the ... button longer than 2 seconds.

Special features:

> With the destination guidance system and the map view started, the current destina- tion is stored.

> During destination entry via a map, the coordinates at the cursor are stored, not the current destination.

Telephone, phone numbers 1. Enter the phone number or select it in a list

of the stored phone numbers, e.g. of the A-Z list.

2. Press the ... button longer than 2 seconds.

If a name is assigned to the phone number, the name will also be stored.

iD ri

ve

22

Entertainment In the Entertainment menu, the sound source currently heard, e.g. a radio station, is stored, regardless of the selection on the Control Dis- play.

1. Select the desired function, e.g. radio sta- tion or CD.

2. Press the ... button longer than 2 seconds.

If the vehicle is equipped with two drives, the current track is stored for CDs with

compressed audio files.<

Running function Press the ... button.

When selecting a phone number, the connec- tion is also established, or the destination guid- ance is started when a navigation destination is selected.

Displaying button assignment You can display the assignment of the buttons by touching them with your finger. Please do not wear gloves when doing so. Touching with an object, e.g. a pen, does not function.

Displaying short info Touch the ... button.

The assignment of the buttons is displayed.

Destination of navigation system

Entertainment source

Telephone, phone number

Not assigned

Displaying detailed information Touch the ... button longer.

Deleting button assignments 1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Select "Programmable Memory Keys" and press the controller.

6. Select "Delete assignment of all memory keys" and press the controller.

7. Acknowledge with "Yes".

A t

a g

la n

ce

23

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Voice command system

The concept The voice command system allows you to con- trol operation of various vehicle systems with- out taking your hands off the steering wheel.

Individual menu items on the Control Display can be spoken as commands. This frees you of having to use the controller.

The voice command system transforms your spoken commands into control signals for the selected systems and provides support in the form of instructions or questions.

The voice command system includes a special microphone.

The microphone is located:

> Near the interior rearview mirror in the Coupe, refer to page 14

> On the steering column in the Convertible

Prerequisite In order to enable identification of the com- mands to be spoken, use iDrive to set the lan- guage for the voice command system. Setting iDrive language, refer to page 84.

Symbols in Owner's Manual

Voice commands

Activating voice command system 1. Press the button.

This symbol on the Control Display and an acoustic signal tell you that the voice command system can respond to com- mands.

2. Say the command. The command is displayed on the Control Display.

This symbol is shown on the Control Display when you can input additional commands.

*

{...} Say the specified commands word for word. {{...}} Indicates the responses of the voice command system.

V o

ic e

co m

m an

d s

ys te

m

24

If no other commands are possible, then oper- ate the equipment using iDrive.

Terminating or canceling voice command Press the button on the steering wheel or

Commands

Having possible commands read aloud You can have the system read aloud the possi- ble commands related to the selected menu item on the Control Display. To have the system list the possible com- mands:

For example, if you have selected "CD", the system will read aloud the possible commands for operating the CD player and the CD changer*.

Opening help

Using alternative commands There are often several commands for running a function, e.g.:

Running functions directly with short commands With short commands you can run certain func- tions directly, regardless of which menu item is selected, refer to page 238.

Opening start menu

An example: selecting a track 1. Switch on Entertainment sound output if

necessary.

2. Press the button on the steering wheel.

5. Press the button on the steering wheel.

{Cancel}

{Options}

{Help}

{Radio on} or {Turn radio on}

{Main menu}

3. {Entertainment} The system says: {{Entertainment}}

4. {CD} The system says: {{CD on}}

6. Select a track, e.g.: {Track 1} The system says: {{Track 1}}

A t

a g

la n

ce

25

R e

fe re

n ce

C o

n tr

o ls

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

C om

m un

ic at

io ns

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

M o

b il

it y

Notes The mobile phone can also be operated with voice commands, refer to

page 195.<

For voice commands, bear the following in mind:

> Say the commands and numbers smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses. This also applies to spelling when entering the destination.

> Always issue commands in the language of the voice command system.

> When selecting a radio station, use the usual pronunciation of the station name.

> For entries in the voice-activated phone book, only use names in the language of the voice command system and do not use abbreviations.

> Keep the doors, windows and glass sun- roof* or convertible top closed to prevent interference from ambient noise.

> Avoid background noises in the vehicle while speaking.

Controls This chapter is intended to provide you with

information for complete control of your vehicle. Its extensive array of features and accessories,

both for driving and for your own safety, comfort and convenience, are described here.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

28

Opening and closing

Keys/remote control

1 Remote control with integrated key

2 Spare key

3 Adapter for spare key, in glove compart- ment

Remote control with integrated key Each remote control contains a battery which is charged in the ignition lock while driving. Drive a longer distance with each remote control at least twice a year to keep the battery charged. For comfort access*, the remote control con- tains a replaceable battery, refer to page 38.

Depending on which remote control is detected by the vehicle during unlocking, different set- tings are activated and executed in the vehicle, refer to Personal Profile, page 29.

Information on the required maintenance is also stored in the remote control, refer to Service data in remote control, page 221.

Integrated key

Press button 1 to unlock the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:

> Hotel function, refer to page 33

> Driver's door, refer to page 32

> Luggage compartment lid, refer to page 34

New remote controls To obtain additional or replace lost keys, new remote controls with an integrated key are available at your BMW center.

Spare key Store the spare key in a safe place such as your wallet. This key is not intended for regular use.

The spare key and integrated key of the remote control fit the same locks.

Adapter for spare key The adapter is required so that the vehicle can be started with the spare key or radio readiness can be switched on.

Remove the adapter from the holder in the glove compartment and slide the spare key into the adapter before use.

C o

n tr

o ls

29

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Personal Profile

The concept You can set a number of functions of your BMW individually according to your preferences. Personal Profile ensures that most of these set- tings are stored for the remote control currently in use without you having to do anything. When the vehicle is unlocked, the corresponding remote control is detected and the settings stored for it are called up and carried out.

This means that you will always find your BMW set to your own personal settings even if another person with his/her own remote control and settings has used the vehicle since the last time you drove it. The individual settings are stored for a maximum of four remote controls.

Personal Profile settings Details on the settings are provided on the specified pages.

> Behavior of the central locking system when unlocking vehicle, refer to page 30

> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to page 33

> Programming buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 55

> Displays on Control Display:

> 12h/24h clock mode, refer to page 83

> Date format, refer to page 83

> Brightness of the Control Display, refer to page 83

> Units of measure for consumption, route/distances, temperature and pres- sure, refer to page 84

> Language on the Control Display, refer to page 84

> Lighting settings:

> Triple turn signal activation, refer to page 64

> Welcome lamps, refer to page 102

> Pathway lighting, refer to page 103

> Daytime running lamps*, refer to page 103

> High-beam assistant*, refer to page 104

> PDC Park Distance Control*: optical warn- ing, refer to page 86

> Head-Up Display*: selection and bright- ness of display, refer to page 97

> BMW Night Vision*: display settings, refer to page 100

> Automatic climate control: for AUTO pro- gram and intensity, cooling function, and automatic recirculated air control/recircu- lated air mode, temperature, air distribution, temperature in the upper body region, refer to page 109

> Navigation system*: voice instructions for destination guidance, refer to page 132

The most recent settings for the following are also called up during unlocking:

> Programmable memory/direct selection buttons: selecting stored functions, refer to page 44

> Driver's seat, exterior-mirror and steering- wheel position, refer to page 49

> Audio sources: volume and tone settings, refer to page 159

> Radio: display of stored stations, refer to page 162

> Phone: adjusting volume, refer to page 190

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

30

Central locking system

The concept The central locking system is ready for opera- tion whenever the driver's door is closed.

The system either locks or unlocks all of the fol- lowing:

> Doors

> Compartment in the front center console

> Luggage compartment lid

> Fuel filler door

Operating from outside > via the remote control

> via the door lock

> with comfort access* via the door handles

These actions operate the anti-theft system at the same time. It prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or door han- dles. The interior lamps and the courtesy lamps* are also switched on and off with the remote control. The alarm systemis armed/dis- armed at the same time. You can find more detailed information on the alarm systemon page 35.

Operating from inside Via the central locking button, refer to page 32. The fuel filler doorand the compartment in the front center console are not locked, refer to page 32.

In the event of a serious accident, the central locking system unlocks automatically. The haz- ard warning flashers and interior lamps are also switched on.

Opening and closing: Using remote control

Persons or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from

the inside. Always take along the remote control when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.<

Unlocking Press the button.

You can set how the vehicle is unlocked. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Central locking" and press the con- troller.

7. Select "Unlock button" and press the con- troller.

8. Select a menu item:

> "All doors" Press the button once to unlock the entire vehicle.

> "Driver's door only"* Press the button once to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler door.

C o

n tr

o ls

31

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Press the button twice to unlock the entire vehicle.

9. Press the controller.

Comfort opening mode Press and hold the button:

> Coupe: the windows are opened, the glass sunroof* is raised and the sliding visor slides back.

> Convertible: the windows and the convert- ible top are opened.

Watch the convertible top during the opening process to be sure that no

one is injured. Releasing the button stops the operation.<

Locking doors Press the button.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if persons are inside, as unlocking from the

inside is not possible without special knowl- edge.<

Switching on interior lamps With vehicle locked: Press the button. You can also use this function to locate your vehicle in parking garages etc.

Panic mode* You can trigger the alarm system in case of dan- ger:

Press the button for at least 3 seconds.

To switch off alarm: press any button.

Opening luggage compartment lid Press the button for approx. 1 second.

The luggage compartment lid opens, regard- less of whether it was previously locked or unlocked.

A previously locked luggage compart- ment lid is also locked again after closing.

Coupe: during opening, the luggage compart- ment lid pivots back and up. Make sure there is sufficient clearance.<

Confirmation signals You can activate or deactivate the confirmation signals.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Confirmation" and press the con- troller.

7. Select the desired signal.

8. Press the controller. The signal is activated.

Malfunction The remote control may malfunction due to local radio waves. Should the remote control fail to operate due to interference of this kind, unlock and lock the vehicle via the door lock using a key.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

32

If it is no longer possible to lock the vehicle using the remote control, then the battery is discharged. Use this remote control during an extended drive; this will recharge the battery, refer to page 28.

For US owners only The transmitter and receiver units comply with part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communication Commission regulations. Operation is gov- erned by the following:

FCC ID: LX8766S LX8766E LX8CAS LX8CAS2

Compliance statement: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

> This device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and

> this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modifications or changes to these devices could void the

user's authority to operate this equipment.<

Using door lock Do not lock the vehicle from the outside if persons are inside, as unlocking from the

inside is not possible without special knowl- edge.<

When unlocking 1. Turning the key once unlocks the driver's

door and the fuel filler door.

2. A second turn of the key unlocks the pas- senger door and luggage compartment lid.

Convenient operation You can use the door lock to operate the win- dows and the glass sunroof* in the Coupe or to operate the windows and the top in the Con- vertible.

Turn and hold the key in the positions for unlocking or locking.

Keep a close eye on the closing process and also on the opening process of the

convertible top to be sure that no one is injured. Releasing the key stops the operation.<

Manual operation In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can turn a key all the way to the right or left in the door lock to lock or unlock the driver's door.

Opening and closing: from inside

This button serves to unlock or lock doors and the luggage compartment lid, but does not acti- vate the anti-theft system. The fuel filler door remains unlocked.

Automatic locking iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

C o

n tr

o ls

33

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Central locking" and press the con- troller.

7. Select a menu item:

> "Relock door if not opened" The central locking system locks again after a short time if no door has been opened.

> "Lock after driving" The central locking system locks the vehicle as soon as you start to drive.

8. Press the controller. The setting is selected.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Unlocking and opening > Either unlock both doors at the same time

with the button for the central locking sys- tem and then pull the door handle above the armrest or

> pull the door handle for each door twice: the first pull unlocks the door, and the second one opens it.

Locking > Use the central locking button to lock both

of the doors simultaneously, or

> press down the lock button of a door. To prevent you from being locked out, the

open driver's door cannot be locked using the lock button.

Persons or animals left unattended in a parked vehicle can lock the doors from

the inside. Always take along the remote control when leaving the vehicle so that the vehicle can then be opened from the outside.<

Hotel function The hotel function locks the compartment in the front center console and the luggage com- partment lid separately and disconnects them from the central locking system. If you hand over the remote control without the integrated key, refer to page 28, e.g. at a hotel, then this prevents access to the luggage compartment and to the compartment in the front center con- sole.

Turn the key to the right, refer to illustration, until the key slot points in the direction of travel and then remove: The hotel function is activated after subsequent locking or unlocking of the vehicle. The system locks the luggage compartment lid and the compartment in the front center console and disconnects them from the central locking sys- tem.

Unlocking manually In order to manually unlock the compartment in the front center console in the event of an elec- trical malfunction, turn the key all the way to the right until it reaches the stop.

If unlocking was manual, return the lock to the home position, i.e. all the way back to

the left, before reactivating the hotel function.<

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

34

Doors

Automatic soft closing* To close the doors, merely push them gently. The closing process will then be carried out automatically.

Make sure that the closing path of the doors is clear; otherwise injuries may

result.<

Luggage compartment lid During opening, the luggage compart- ment lid pivots back and up. Make sure

there is sufficient clearance.<

Opening from inside

Press the button: The luggage compartment lid opens, provided that it is not locked or the hotel function is not activated, refer to the above section.

Opening from outside

Press the upper half of the BMW emblem or press the button on the remote control for approx. 1 second: the luggage compartment lid opens.

Convertible: if the convertible top is not completely open or closed, then the lug-

gage compartment lid cannot be opened, refer to page 43.<

Unlocking manually

The luggage compartment lid lock is located under the BMW emblem. All keys, refer to page 28, fit the luggage compartment lid lock.

Turn the key toward the right up to the stop: the luggage compartment lid opens.

If you use the lock to open the luggage compartment lid while the alarm system

is armed, the alarm will be triggered. To prevent this, you should deactivate the alarm before- hand. If the alarm has been triggered accidentally, switch off the alarm, refer to page 35.<

Closing Make sure that the closing path of the luggage compartment lid is clear; other-

wise, injuries may result.<

The handle recesses on the interior trim of the luggage compartment lid make it easier to pull down.

C o

n tr

o ls

35

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Emergency release

Pull the lever in the luggage compartment. The luggage compartment lid is unlocked.

Luggage compartment There are four lashing eyes on the inner corners of the luggage compartment for securing lug- gage nets* or securing straps to fix luggage in position. Also refer to Securing cargo, page 128.

Convertible: increasing luggage compartment capacity

With the convertible top closed, you can increase the luggage compartment capacity: To do so, unfold the handle and press it down- ward in the direction of travel, refer to arrow. This moves the convertible top compartment floor into the raised position.

Before opening the convertible top, carry out this procedure in reverse order.

The convertible top cannot be opened if the convertible top compartment floor is

in the raised position.<

Alarm system

The concept The vehicle alarm system responds:

> To the opening of a door, the hood, or the luggage compartment lid

> To movements in the vehicle interior: interior motion sensor, refer to page 36

> To changes in the vehicle's tilt if someone attempts to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle

> To interruptions in battery voltage

Unauthorized operations are briefly signaled by the alarm system:

> by triggering an acoustic alarm

> by switching onthe hazard warning flashers

> by flashing the high beams

Arming and disarming alarm system When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same time.

You can open the luggage compartment lid, even with the system armed, by using the button of the remote control, refer to page 31. When the luggage compartment lid is closed, it is once again locked and monitored.

Switching off alarm > Unlock the vehicle using the remote control,

refer to page 30, or

> insert the remote control all the way into the ignition lock.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

36

Indicator lamp displays

> The indicator lamp below the interior rear- view mirror flashes continuously: the sys- tem is armed.

> The indicator lamp flashes after locking: the doors, hood or luggage compartment lid are not properly closed. Even if you do not close the alerted area, the system begins to mon- itor the remaining areas, and the indicator lamp flashes continuously after approx. 10 seconds. However, the interior motion sensor is not activated.

> After the vehicle is unlocked, the indicator lamp goes out: no manipulation or attempted intrusions have been detected in the period since the system was armed.

> The indicator lamp flashes after unlocking until the remote control is inserted into the ignition lock, however for a maximum of approx. 5 minutes: an attempted entry has been detected in the period since the sys- tem was armed.

Tilt alarm sensor Monitors the inclination of the vehicle. The alarm system reacts, for example, if someone attempts to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle.

Interior motion sensor Coupe: In order for the interior motion sensor to func- tion properly, the windows and glass sunroof* must be completely closed.

Convertible: Monitors the interior up to the height of the seat cushions. This means that the alarm system, including the interior motion sensor, is armed

even if the convertible top is open. Falling objects, e.g. leaves, can trigger false alarms, refer to Avoiding unintentional alarms.

Avoiding unintentional alarms The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor may be switched off at the same time. This prevents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following situations:

> In two-level garages

> When transporting on car-carrying trains, by sea or on a trailer

> When animals are to remain in the vehicle

Switching off tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor Press the button on the remote control again as soon as the vehicle is locked.

The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is unlocked and locked again.

Comfort access* Comfort access allows you to access your vehi- cle without having to hold the remote control in your hand. It is sufficient to carry the remote control with you, e.g. in your jacket pocket. The vehicle automatically detects the associated remote control in the immediate vicinity or in the interior.

Comfort access supports the following func- tions:

> Unlocking/locking vehicle

> Comfort closing with Coupe

> Opening luggage compartment lid sepa- rately

> Starting engine

Functional requirement > The vehicle or the luggage compartment lid

can only be locked if the vehicle detects that the remote control you are carrying is out- side the vehicle.

C o

n tr

o ls

37

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

> The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds.

> The engine can only be started if the vehicle detects that the remote control is located in the vehicle.

Comparison with ordinary remote control You can control the functions mentioned previ- ously with the comfort access or by pressing the buttons on the remote control. Before doing so, please familiarize yourself with the informa- tion on opening and closing, starting on page 28.

The special features when using comfort access are described below.

Should a short delay occur when opening or closing the windows, the glass sunroof

or the convertible top, the system is checking whether a remote control is located in the vehi- cle. Please repeat opening or closing if neces- sary.<

Unlocking

Grasp a door handle fully, refer to arrow 1, but do not touch the surfaces, arrow 2 or 3 when doing so. This corresponds to pressing the

button.

Locking > On the driver's door, touch the highlighted

surface, arrow 2, with a finger for approx. 1 second, but do not grasp the door handle.

> On the front passenger door, touch the highlighted surface, arrow 3, with the back of your hand for approx. 1 second, but do not grasp the door handle.

This corresponds to pressing the but- ton.

Please make sure that the ignition and all electronic systems/consumers are

switched off before locking to save the bat- tery.<

Coupe: comfort closing Hold a finger or the back of your hand against the surface, arrow 2 or 3, but do not grasp the door handle while doing so.

The windows, the glass sunroof* and the slid- ing visor are closed.

Watch during the closing process to be sure that no one is injured. Removing the

hand from the door handle stops the closing process immediately.<

Convertible: window and convertible top operation From radio readiness switched on, the windows can be opened and closed, and with the vehicle stopped the convertible top, when a remote control is located in the interior of the vehicle.

Opening luggage compartment lid separately Press the upper half of the BMW emblem. This corresponds to pressing the button.

If a remote control accidentally left in the luggage compartment is detected inside

the locked vehicle after the luggage compart- ment lid has been closed, then the luggage compartment lid opens again. The hazard warn- ing flashers flash and a signal* sounds.<

Switching on radio readiness By pressing the Start/Stop button, you switch on the radio readiness, refer to page 58.

When doing so, do not depress the brake or clutch pedal, otherwise the engine will

start immediately.<

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

38

Starting engine You can start the engine or switch on the igni- tion if a remote control is located in the interior of the vehicle. It need not be inserted in the igni- tion lock, refer to page 58.

If you take the remote control with you when leaving the vehicle with the engine running, a warning lamp lights up. In addition, a message appears on the Control Display. As long as no remote control is detected, it is only possible to restart the engine within approx. 10 seconds after it is switched off.

Switching off engine when equipped with sport automatic transmission The engine can only be switched off in trans- mission position P, refer to page 59. To switch off the engine in transmission posi- tion N, the remote control must be inserted in the ignition lock.

Before driving into a car wash in vehicles equipped with automatic transmission 1. Insert remote control into ignition lock.

2. Depress brake pedal.

3. Engage transmission position N.

4. Switch off the engine.

The vehicle can roll.

Malfunction The comfort access function may malfunction due to local radio waves. If this occurs, then open or close the vehicle with the buttons on the remote control or with a key. To start the engine after this, insert the remote control in the ignition lock.

When unlocking or locking/comfort closing do not simultaneously grasp the door handle and touch the surfaces, arrow 2 or 3. Otherwise, you may limit the function.

Replacing battery If the battery of the remote control is dead, a message will appear in the Control Display.

1. Remove integrated key from remote con- trol, refer to page 28.

2. Remove cover.

3. Insert new battery with positive side facing upward.

4. Press cover closed.

Return used battery to a recycling collec- tion point or to your BMW center.<

Windows To prevent injuries, exercise care when closing the windows and keep them in

your field of vision until they are shut. Always take along the remote control when you leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for example, operate the windows and injure them- selves.<

Coupe: opening, closing

> Press switch to resistance point: The window continues to open for as long as you hold down the switch.

C o

n tr

o ls

39

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the opening move- ment.

You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch.

Convertible: opening, closing For information on window operation with com- fort access, also refer to page 37.

To close the side windows while the vehi- cle is being driven, always close the rear

windows first or all four windows simulta- neously; otherwise, the windows cannot close tightly at higher speeds.<

Individually

> Press switch to resistance point: The window continues to open for as long as you hold down the switch.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the opening move- ment.

You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch. The rear windows cannot be closed automatically.

Together

1. Briefly press button 1: The LEDs in button 1 and switch 2 light up for approx. 10 seconds.

2. Press switch 2:

> Down to the resistance point: All windows, including the rear window, continue to open as long as you press the switch. You can close the windows in the same manner by pulling the switch.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: All windows open automatically. Press- ing the switch again stops the opening movement.

Briefly press button 1 again to deactivate the function. The LEDs go out.

Rear window

1. Briefly press button 1: The LEDs in button 1 and switch 2 light up for approx. 10 seconds.

2. Press switch 2:

> Down to the resistance point: The rear window continues to open for as long as you hold down the switch.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

40

You can close the rear window in the same manner by pulling the switch.

> Press the switch beyond the resistance point: The rear window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the opening movement.

Briefly press button 1 again to deactivate the function. The LEDs go out.

The rear window opens and closes auto- matically when you open or close the con-

vertible top.<

For information on using the convenient opera- tion mode at the door lock or with the remote control, refer to page 31 or 32.

Coupe: for information on comfort closing with comfort access, refer to page 37.

After switching off ignition You can still operate the windows with the remote control removed or the ignition switched off for approx. 1 minute, as long as neither of the doors has been opened.

Pinch protection system If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a window closes, the closing action is interrupted and the window reopens slightly.

Despite the pinch protection system, inspect the window's travel path prior to

closing it, as the safety system might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as thin objects, and the window would continue closing. Do not install any accessories in the range of movement of the windows, otherwise the pinch protection system will be impaired. Convertible: the rear side windows and rear window are not equipped with a pinch protec- tion system. Therefore, watch the rear side win- dows and the rear window during closing, oth- erwise injuries can occur.<

Closing without pinch protection system In case of danger from outside or if, for example, ice on the window prevents normal closing, pro- ceed as follows:

1. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point and hold. The pinch protection system is limited and the window opens slightly if the closing force exceeds a certain value.

2. Pull the switch beyond the resistance point and hold again within approx. 4 seconds. The window closes without the pinch pro- tection system.

Coupe: Glass sunroof, electric with raise function* The glass sunroof and sliding visor are opera- tional whenever the ignition is switched on.

To prevent injuries, exercise care when closing the glass sunroof and keep it in

your field of vision until it is shut. Always take along the remote control when you leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for example, operate the roof and injure them- selves.<

Raising and closing glass sunroof

> Briefly press the switch: The sunroof opens and the sliding visor moves back approx. 2 in/5 cm or press the switch twice beyond the resis- tance point toward the rear: The sunroof opens and the sliding visor moves completely back.

C o

n tr

o ls

41

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

> To close, briefly press the switch or push it twice beyond the resistance point toward the front: The sunroof and sliding visor close.

Opening and closing sliding visor > Push the switch up to the resistance point in

the desired direction: The sliding visor continues to move for as long as you hold the switch.

> Push the switch beyond the resistance point in the desired direction: The sliding visor moves automatically. Briefly press the switch again in any direc- tion to stop the movement.

For information on using the convenient opera- tion mode at the door lock or with the remote control, refer to page 31 or 32.

for information on comfort closing with comfort access, refer to page 37.

Pinch protection system If the glass sunroof encounters resistance when closing, the closing action is interrupted and the glass sunroof opens. If the sliding visor encounters resistance when closing within the last approx. 8 in/20 cm, the closing action is interrupted and the sliding visor opens again slightly.

Despite the pinch protection system, you should inspect the sunroof's travel range

prior to closing it, as the safety feature might fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such as very thin objects, and the sunroof would con- tinue closing.<

Closing without pinch protection system In case of danger from outside, slide the switch forward beyond the resistance point and hold. The roof closes without the pinch protection system.

Following interruptions in electrical power supply After an interruption in the power supply the glass sunroof may not move. Then have the system initialized. Should this occur, please have the sunroof initialized at your BMW center.

Moving manually* In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can move the glass sunroof and the sliding visor manually.

Glass sunroof 1. Remove cover on headliner in front of rear

window. To do so, lift gently away from headliner at the front, arrow 1, using the screwdriver from the on-board tool kit, refer to page 223. Grasp behind the cover, arrows 2 and pull firmly downward.

2. Insert Allen wrench from onboard tool kit, refer to page 223, into the opening pro- vided.

3. Use the Allen wrench to move the glass sunroof in the desired direction.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

42

Sliding visor 1. Fold the cover downward, if necessary

using the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 223.

2. Insert the Allen wrench supplied with the onboard tool kit into the opening provided.

3. Use the Allen wrench to move the sliding visor in the desired direction.

Convertible: top The fully automatic convertible top combines secure weather protection with simple and con- venient operation.

Here are a few tips for getting the maximum pleasure from your Convertible:

> It is advisable to close the convertible top when the vehicle is parked. The closed con- vertible top not only protects the passenger compartment from unforeseen weather damage, it also provides a certain amount of protection from theft. Nonetheless, even if the convertible top is closed, only keep valuables in the locked luggage compart- ment.

> Do not attach luggage rack systems to the convertible top.

In order to avoid damage, do not move the convertible top at temperatures below

+147/106. Do not leave the convertible top in its storage compartment for longer than one day when wet; otherwise, damage from moisture can occur. Do not place any objects on the convertible top; otherwise, if the top were to be operated, these objects could fall off and lead to damage or injury. Never move the convertible top when the roll- over protection system is raised. Driving without having completed the opening or closing action can lead to damage or injury. Do not place hands in the top mechanism dur- ing the opening and closing action. Keep chil- dren away from the travel path of the convert- ible top. For safety reasons, do not move the convertible top unless the vehicle is stationary.<

If you have initiated top movement with the vehicle at a stop and then start to

drive, e.g. at a traffic light, you can continue the initiated operation up to a speed of 20 mph/ 30 km/h: To do so, press and hold the corresponding button.<

Partial vacuums that occur at higher speeds in the passenger compartment

can make the convertible top flap. Use the auto- matic climate control to increase the air volume so that a partial vacuum in the vehicle does not occur.<

Prior to opening and closing > Read the safety precautions above carefully

and comply with them fully.

> Ensure that the convertible top compart- ment floor in the luggage compartment is folded down, refer to page 35, as otherwise the convertible top cannot be opened.

> Make sure that the luggage compartment lid is closed.

C o

n tr

o ls

43

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Opening and closing For information on top operation with comfort access, also refer to page 37.

From radio readiness, refer to page 58, with the vehicle stationary:

To avoid putting excessive strain on the battery, only move the convertible top

when the engine is running if possible. Before closing the convertible top, remove for- eign objects from the windshield frame, as these might inhibit closing of the convertible top.<

1 Closing

2 LED

3 Opening

When the button for operating the con- vertible top is pressed, the side windows

move downward slightly and the rear window is lowered completely. If you hold down the button after the LED 2 goes out, then the windows travel upward again. If the convertible top is not completely open or closed, then the luggage compartment lid can- not be opened.<

LED In the following situations, in addition to the LED, a message is displayed on the Control Display and an acoustic signal may sound:

> During convertible top operation, the LED lights up green. It goes out as soon as the opening or closing action is finished.

> If the LED flashes red when you release the button, the opening or closing action has not yet finished.

> If the LED lights up red when the button is pressed, either the convertible top com- partment floor in the luggage compartment is in the raised position or a malfunction has occurred. The convertible top cannot be moved.

Interruption The automatic sequence of movements is interrupted if the button for top operation is released. The sequence can be continued in the desired direction by pressing the appropri- ate button. If the opening or closing action is interrupted for a longer period, the convertible top remains in that position for approx. 15 minutes before it slowly moves to a stable position.

A convertible top which is not completely opened or closed presents a danger.

Do not interrupt and continue the closing action several times in succession; otherwise, the top mechanism can be damaged.<

If the convertible top is not completely open or closed, then the luggage com-

partment lid cannot be opened.<

Convenient operation with remote control and via door lock Refer to pages 31 and 32.

Closing manually Only close the convertible top manually if absolutely necessary; never open it man-

ually. The convertible top compartment lid can- not be locked in the event of an electrical mal- function and would open while the vehicle is being driven. Improper handling can lead to damage.<

Before closing 1. Open luggage compartment lid.

2. Take the Allen wrench and the screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 223.

3. Pry out the two buttons in the luggage com- partment with the screwdriver and then pull firmly. This unlocks the convertible top compartment lid.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

44

4. Close luggage compartment lid.

During manual convertible top opera- tion, the luggage compartment lid

cannot be opened.<

5. Completely open the side windows and the rear window. If the rear window cannot be opened using the switch, it must be lowered manually.

Opening rear window manually 1. Pry out the cover between the rear head

restraints. To do so, place the screwdriver as close as possible to the locking ele- ments, as shown in the illustration.

2. Insert the Allen wrench as far as possible into the opening and turn firmly in the direc- tion indicated by the arrow until the rear window is completely open.

Closing Perform the following work steps with the assistance of a second person and with

the doors open, otherwise injury and damage to the convertible top can occur.<

1. Push the cover 1 on the left and right of the side panel forward. Reach into the resulting openings and raise the convertible top compartment lid 2 as far as it will go.

2. Grasp the top with both hands at the left and right side frame, arrow 3.

Only lift out the top by the side frame, otherwise the top may be damaged.<

3. Together with the other person, pull the two sides of the convertible top out simulta- neously and pivot forward. When doing so, keep the convertible top compartment lid open, arrow 4, e.g. with your shoulder.

C o

n tr

o ls

45

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Do not carry out the next operation, raising top ends, until the top has

been swung forward, otherwise damage can occur.<

4. Raise the two convertible top ends as far as possible, arrow 5, and close the convertible top compartment lid, arrow 6.

5. Fold the top ends down onto the convert- ible top compartment lid.

6. From the interior, take out the cover in the center of the front top frame; use a screw- driver if necessary.

7. Insert the Allen wrench into the opening provided.

8. From the outside, both persons pull the front frame of the convertible top down- ward, as simultaneously as possible on the two sides.

9. Turn the Allen wrench in the direction of the arrow until the front convertible top frame is locked to the windshield frame. The rear convertible top ends are automati- cally pressed onto the convertible top com- partment lid and close tightly with tension.

10. If necessary, close the rear window again manually in the same way as above.

Wind deflector* The wind deflector keeps the air movement in the passenger compartment to a minimum when the convertible top is open, thus enabling pleasant driving even at higher speeds.

The wind deflector is stowed in a protective sleeve in the luggage compartment. Short instructions for use are also provided on the protective sleeve.

Before installing 1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec-

tive sleeve and fold it open, refer to arrows 1.

2. Press the upper and lower section together until the locking device engages, refer to arrow 2.

3. Push the securing pin 3 out until it engages.

4. Unfold the rear mounts 4.

O p

en in

g a

n d

c lo

si n

g

46

Installing 1. Insert the securing pin 1 of the wind deflec-

tor into the appropriate opening on the right side of the vehicle.

2. Guide the rear mounts 2 into the recepta- cles provided.

3. Push the securing pin 3 on the left side into the appropriate opening until it snaps into place.

4. Fold up the upper half 4 of the wind deflec- tor.

With wind deflector fitted: do not incline the front seat backrests too far backward

if the seat is to be moved back to the end posi- tion. Otherwise, the wind deflector will be dam- aged.<

Removing The same as installing, but in reverse order.

Folding up

1. Push the handle of the securing pin on the wind deflector on the left side of the vehicle all the way back and release the locking mechanism.

2. Fold in the upper and lower section.

C o

n tr

o ls

47

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Adjusting

Sitting safely The ideal sitting position can make a vital con- tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the interaction with the safety belts, the head restraints and the airbags, the seat position plays an important role in an accident. To ensure that the safety systems operate with optimal efficiency, we strongly urge you to fol- low the instructions contained in the following section.

For additional information on Transporting chil- dren safely, refer to page 56.

Airbags Always maintain an adequate distance between yourself and the airbags. Always

hold the steering wheel by its rim with hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to mini- mize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms in the event of airbag deployment. No one and nothing is to come between the air- bags and the seat occupant. Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly and does not rest feet or legs on the instrument panel, otherwise leg injuries can occur if the knee and front airbags are triggered. Make sure that occupants do not rest their head on the side or head airbags; otherwise, injuries can occur if the airbags are triggered.<

Even if you adhere to all the instructions, inju- ries resulting from contact with airbags cannot be fully excluded, depending on the circum- stances. The ignition and inflation noise may provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi- tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem- porary.

For airbag locations and additional information on airbags, refer to page 94.

Head restraints A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in an accident.

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approx. at ear level. Otherwise, there is

increased danger of injury in the event of an accident.<

Head restraints, refer to page 50.

Safety belt Before every drive, make sure that safety belts are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air- bags complement the safety belt as an addi- tional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Your vehicle has four seats that are each equipped with a safety belt.

Never allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Never allow

infants or small children to ride in a passenger's lap. Make sure that the belt lies low around the hips in the lap area and does not press on the abdomen. The safety belt must not lie across the neck, rub against sharp edges, be routed over solid or breakable objects or be pinched. Wear the safety belt without twisting, snugly across the lap and shoulders, as close to the body as possible. Otherwise, the belt can slip over the hips in the lap area in a frontal impact and injure the abdomen. Avoid wearing clothing that prevents the belt from fitting properly and pull the shoulder belt upward periodically to readjust the tension across your lap in order to avoid a reduction in the restraining effect of the safety belt.<

Safety belts refer to page 52.

A d

ju st

in g

48

Seats

Note before adjusting Never attempt to adjust your seat while operating the vehicle. The seat could

respond with unexpected movement and the ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an accident. On the front passenger side as well, do not tilt the backrest too far toward the rear. Failure to observe this precaution can prevent the belt from providing effective protection against injury, as the passenger could slide under the belt in an accident.<

Please follow the instructions on damage to safety belts provided on page 53 and the infor- mation on the active front head restraints on page 50.

Convertible: with the wind deflector fitted, do not incline the front seat backrests too

far backward if the seat is to be moved back to the end position. Otherwise, the wind deflector will be damaged.<

Adjusting seat To ensure that the safety systems con- tinue to provide optimized protection,

please follow the adjustment instructions on page 47.<

1 Inclination

2 Longitudinal direction

3 Height

4 Backrest

5 Convertible: head restraints, refer to page 51

With the sports seat*, you can also adjust the thigh support manually:

Pull the lever and adjust the thigh support in the longitudinal direction.

Lumbar support*

You can also adjust the contours of the backrest to obtain additional support in the lumbar region.

The upper hips and spinal column receive sup- plementary support to help you maintain a relaxed, upright sitting position.

> Increase or decrease curvature: Press front or rear of switch.

> Move curvature up or down: Press top or bottom of switch.

C o

n tr

o ls

49

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory

You can store and select three different adjust- ment settings for the driver's seat, exterior mir- rors and steering wheel.

The adjustment of the lumbar support is not stored in the memory.

Storing 1. Switch on radio readiness or ignition, refer

to page 58.

2. Adjust the desired seat, exterior mirror and steering-wheel positions.

3. Press the button: The LED in the button lights up.

4. Press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3: The LED goes out.

Requesting Do not request a position from the mem- ory while the vehicle is moving. There is a

risk of accident from unexpected movement of the seat or steering wheel.<

Comfort mode 1. Open the driver's door after unlocking or

switch on radio readiness, refer to page 58.

2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3.

The system cancels the adjustment procedure when you briefly press one of the seat adjust- ment switches or one of the memory buttons.

The adjusting procedure for the steering wheel is interrupted if you briefly press the switch for the steering wheel adjustment in any direction, refer to page 54.

Safety feature 1. Close the driver's door and switch ignition

on or off, refer to page 58.

2. Press the desired memory button 1, 2 or 3 and maintain pressure until the adjustment process has been completed.

If the button was pressed inadvertently: press the button again; the LED goes out.

Activating with remote control The last positions of the driver's seat, external rearview mirrors, and steering wheel are stored for the remote key currently in use.

You can choose when the position is requested:

> Request when unlocking vehicle

> Request when opening driver's door

When using this feature, always make sure that the footwell behind the driver's

seat is empty and unobstructed. If you fail to do so, any persons or objects behind the seat could be injured or damaged by a rearward movement of the seat.<

The system cancels the adjustment procedure when you briefly press one of the seat adjust- ment switches or one of the memory buttons.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

A d

ju st

in g

50

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Door locks" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Central locking" and press the con- troller.

7. Select "Last seat pos." and press the con- troller.

8. Select "After unlocking" or "After door opened".

9. Press the controller.

To cancel the request: Select "Deactivated" and press the controller.

Front head restraints A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the risk of injury to cervical vertebrae in an accident.

Adjust the head restraint so that its center is approx. at ear level. Otherwise, there is

increased danger of injury in the event of an accident. Only remove the head restraints if no one will be sitting on the seat in question. Rein- stall the head restraints before transporting passengers, as otherwise the head restraint cannot provide its protective function.<

Active front head restraints In the event of a rear-end collision of sufficient severity, the active head restraint reduces the distance to the head.

Do not use seat covers or head restraint covers that could impede the proper

functioning of the active head restraint. Other- wise, there is no assurance that the active head restraint will perform its protective function and it is not possible to take advantage of its injury- reducing potential in the event of a rear-end collision. Have the active head restraints reset after they are triggered in a rear-end collision. Only have this work carried out by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per- sonnel. Otherwise, this safety equipment will not function properly.<

Please contact a BMW center if you wish to have the front head restraints removed

and installed.<

Coupe

Adjusting height

> To raise: pull the head restraint upward.

> To lower: slide the head restraint down- ward.

To reach the lowest position, press the button, refer to arrow 1.<

C o

n tr

o ls

51

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Front seats: adjusting distance to the back of the head

> Forward: pull up.

> Back: push the button and slide the head- rest cushion toward the rear.

Do not place any objects behind the headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can

impair the proper function of the head restraint.<

Convertible

Adjusting height

Move the switch up or down.

Front seats: adjusting distance to the back of the head

> Forward: pull up.

> Back: push the button and slide the head- rest cushion toward the rear.

Do not place any objects behind the headrest cushion. Otherwise, you can

impair the proper function of the head restraint.<

Entering rear Before starting to drive, fold backrests back, otherwise there is the danger of

accident due to an unexpected movement of the seat.<

Coupe: releasing backrest

Pull the lever upward and fold the backrest for- ward. The lever is designed so that the safety belt can be hooked onto it. This enables you to fasten the safety belt more conveniently.

Convertible: releasing backrest

The belt system integrated in the seat makes it easier to get in back.

1. Pull lever 1 up and fold the backrest for- ward.

A d

ju st

in g

52

2. Press and hold button 2 until the seat has moved into the desired position.

3. After passengers have entered the rear, fold the backrest back and lock it in place.

4. Press and hold button 3 until the seat has moved back into its previous position. If you release button 3 before this, the seat stops in its current position.

You can lock the backrest in place when it is folded forward. This is useful, for exam-

ple, when you get into the vehicle while it is parked on a hill. Press the backrest until it audi- bly locks into place. To fold it back, you do not need to use lever 1 to release it.<

Lock backrest warning lamp: Lights up when the backrest is not locked. At the same time, a message is

shown on the Control Display.

Safety belts To ensure that the safety systems con- tinue to provide optimized protection,

please follow the adjustment instructions on page 47.<

Before every drive, make sure that safety belts are being worn at all of the occupied seats. Air- bags complement the safety belt as an addi- tional safety device, but they do not represent a substitute.

Fastening Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in the belt buckle.

Releasing 1. Hold the belt firmly.

2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.

3. Guide the belt into its reel.

The shoulder strap's anchorage point will be in the correct position for adults of every build if the seat is correctly adjusted, refer to page 48.

Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and passenger seat*

The indicator lamp lights up and a sig- nal sounds. At the same time, an addi- tional message appears on the Control

Display. Please check whether safety belts are being worn correctly.

The safety belt reminder is operative at speeds above approx. 5 mph/8 km/h. It can also be acti- vated if objects are placed on the passenger seat.

C o

n tr

o ls

53

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Damage to safety belts When subjected to strain due to an acci- dent or in the event of damage, replace

the safety belts, the belt tensioners, and any child restraint systems and have the belt anchor points checked. Have this work carried out only by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with appropriately trained personnel. Otherwise, correct operation of this safety equipment is not guaranteed.<

Heated seats*

The temperature setting advances one step in its control sequence each time you press the button. The maximum temperature is supplied when three LEDs are lit.

The temperature is reduced and if need be, the heating is switched off in order to reduce the load on the battery. The LEDs remain lit.

To switch off: Press the button longer.

Mirrors

Exterior mirrors The mirror on the passenger's side is more curved than the driver's mirror.

Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance of following traffic based on what you see in the mirrors; otherwise, there is an increased acci- dent risk.<

1 Adjusting

2 Switching to the other mirror or to the automatic curb monitor

3 Folding mirrors in and out* Storing the mirror positions, refer to Seat, mir- ror and steering wheel memory on page 49.

Adjusting manually You can also adjust the mirrors manually by pressing against the outer edges of their mirror glass.

Folding exterior mirrors in and out Pressing button 3 allows you to fold mirrors in and out up to a speed of approx. 20 mph/ 30 km/h. This is advantageous, for example, in car washes, narrow streets or for bringing mir- rors that have been manually folded-in back into the correct position. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out automatically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.

Before going through a car wash, fold the mirrors in manually, or with button 3, oth-

erwise they could be damaged, depending on the width of the car wash system.<

Automatic heating Below a certain outdoor temperature, both exterior mirrors are heated whenever the engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

A d

ju st

in g

54

Tilting down passenger-side mirror automatic curb monitor

Activating 1. Slide switch into the driver's side mirror

position, arrow 1.

2. Shift into reverse or move selector lever into position R. The mirror glass tilts downward somewhat on the passenger's side. This allows the driver to see the area immediately adjacent to the vehicle such as a curb when park- ing, etc.

Deactivating Slide switch into the passenger side mirror position, arrow 2.

Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic dimming feature

This feature is controlled by two photocells in the inside rearview mirror. One is integrated within the mirror's lens, while the other is located at an offset position on the rear of the mirror housing.

For trouble-free operation, keep the photocells clean and do not cover the area between the interior rearview mirror and the windshield.

Also do not attach stickers to the windshield in front of the mirror.

Steering wheel

Adjusting Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is moving. There is a risk of acci-

dent as the result of unexpected movement.<

The steering wheel can be adjusted in four directions.

Storing the steering-wheel position, refer to Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory, page 49.

Easy entry/exit To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle, the steering wheel temporarily moves into the uppermost position.

Steering wheel heating*

Press the button.

The indicator lamp in the button lights up when the steering wheel heater is switched on.

C o

n tr

o ls

55

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Programmable buttons* on steering wheel

You can program the buttons individually.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Steering wheel buttons" and press the controller.

A list of different functions appears:

> "Navigation voice instructions" Voice instructions of the navigation sys- tem*

> "Air recirculation on / off" Permanently shutting off outside air, refer to AUC Automatic recirculated-air control on page 111

> "Mute on / off" Mutes the audio sources

> "Monitor on / off" Switches the Control Display on/off

> "Telephone list"* Display/hide phone book or last list of stored phone numbers displayed

> "Next entertainment source" Changes audio source

> Switches "Night Vision on / off" BMW Night Vision* on/off

5. Select the desired function unit and press the controller.

6. Select the button if necessary and press the controller.

You can now activate the selected function using the corresponding button.

Operating function Press the corresponding button on the steering wheel.

If you have programmed "Navigation voice instructions" for one of the buttons:

> To switch voice instructions on/off: Press the button longer.

> To repeat the last voice instruction: Press the button.

T ra

n sp

o rt

in g

c h

ild re

n s

af el

y

56

Transporting children safely

The right place for children Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger

themselves and other persons, e.g. by opening the doors.<

Children always in the rear Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the back.

Children younger than 13 years of age or with a height under 5 ft/150 cm may only

be transported in the rear in child restraint sys- tems which correspond to the age, weight and height of the child. Otherwise, there is an increased danger of injury in an accident.<

Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, size and weight.

Exception for front passenger seat Should it be necessary to use a child restraint system on the front passenger

seat, the front, knee and side airbags on the passenger side must be deactivated before doing so. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury to the child if the airbags are triggered, even with a child restraint system.<

For more information on automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags, refer to page 94.

Installing child restraint systems

Follow child restraint system manufac- turer's instructions for the selection,

installation and use of child restraint systems. Otherwise, the degree of protection they offer may be reduced.<

On front passenger seat After mounting a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, make sure that

the front and side airbags on the front passen- ger side are deactivated, as otherwise there is an increased risk of injury if the airbags are trig- gered.<

Child seat security

All rear safety belts and the safety belt for the front passenger can be locked against pulling out to secure child restraint systems.

Locking safety belt 1. Secure the child restraint system with the

belt.

2. Pull out the belt webbing completely.

3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in and pull taut against the child restraint system. The safety belt is locked.

Unlocking safety belt 1. Open the belt buckle.

2. Remove the child restraint system.

3. Allow the belt webbing to be pulled in com- pletely.

LATCH child restraint fixing system LATCH: Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHil- dren.

C o

n tr

o ls

57

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Follow the system manufacturer's instructions on installation and use of

LATCH child restraint systems in order not to impair their protective function.<

Anchor points for LATCH mounts Before attaching the LATCH child's seat, pull the belt away from the region of the child restraint fixing system.

Make sure that both of the lower LATCH mounts have properly clicked into place

and that the child restraint system is resting snugly against the backrest. Otherwise, the protective action may be impeded.<

Rear seats

The mounting points for the LATCH anchors are located at the positions indicated by arrows in the gap between the seat and the backrest.

Coupe: child restraint system with tether strap

Only use the top tether-strap mounting points to secure child restraint systems,

otherwise the mounting points could be dam- aged.<

There are two additional mounting points for child restraint systems with a tether strap, refer to arrows.

Placement of tether strap Make sure that the tether strap is not routed over sharp edges and does not

twist on its way to the upper mounting point; otherwise, the belt may not properly secure the child restraint system in the event of an acci- dent.<

1 Direction of travel

2 Head restraints

3 Tether strap hook

4 Mounting point

5 Rear window shelf/luggage compartment floor

6 Backrest

7 Tether strap of child restraint system

Before using the mounting points, fold the head restraint* into its raised position.

1. Slide the head restraint into the bottom position.

2. Guide the tether strap over the head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook to the mount- ing point.

D ri

vi n

g

58

Driving

Ignition lock

Inserting remote control into ignition lock

Insert the remote control as far as possible into the ignition lock.

Radio readiness switches on. Some electronic systems/consumers are ready for operation.

Comfort access* With comfort access, only insert the remote control into the ignition lock in exceptional cases, refer to page 36.

Removing remote control from ignition lock

Do not pull the remote control out of the ignition lock using force, as otherwise

damage may result.<

Before removing the remote control, first press it in as far as possible to release the locking device.

The ignition is switched off if it was still switched on.

Sport automatic transmission The remote control can only be removed when transmission position P is selected: interlock.

Start/Stop button

Pressing the Start/Stop button switches the radio readiness or the ignition on and off.

The engine is started when you press the Start/Stop button and depress the clutch

if your vehicle is equipped with the manual transmission or the brake if your vehicle is equipped with the sport automatic transmis- sion.<

Radio readiness Some electronic systems/consumers are ready for operation. The time and outside tempera- ture are displayed in the instrument cluster.

Radio readiness is switched off:

> when the remote control is removed from the ignition lock

> with comfort access* by touching the sur- face on the door handle, refer to Locking on page 37

Ignition on All electronic systems/consumers are ready for operation. The odometer and the trip odometer are displayed in the instrument cluster, refer to page 74.

Please switch off the ignition and the electronic systems/consumers which are

not required when the engine is not running to save the battery.<

C o

n tr

o ls

59

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Radio readiness and ignition off All indicator and warning lamps in the instru- ment cluster go out.

Starting engine Do not run the engine in closed rooms, otherwise the inhalation of toxic exhaust

gases can cause unconsciousness and death. The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle with the engine running, as such a vehicle represents a potential safety hazard. Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run- ning, select the idling position, or shift the trans- mission into position P and firmly apply the handbrake, otherwise the vehicle can begin to roll.<

Avoid frequent starting in quick succes- sion or repeated starting attempts in

which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the fuel is not burned at all or is burned inade- quately and there is a danger of overheating and damage to the catalytic converter.<

Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it running while the vehicle remains stationary. Instead, drive off at a moderate engine speed.

Manual transmission Remote control in ignition lock or with comfort access in vehicle, refer to page 36.

1. Depress brake pedal.

2. Depress the clutch pedal and select the idling position.

3. Press the Start/Stop button.

Sport automatic transmission* Remote control in ignition lock or with comfort access in vehicle, refer to page 36.

1. Depress brake pedal.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

Switching engine off When leaving the vehicle, always take the remote control with you.

When parking, firmly apply the handbrake, as otherwise the vehicle could roll.<

Manual transmission 1. Press the Start/Stop button with the vehicle

stopped.

2. Shift into first gear or reverse.

3. Firmly apply the handbrake.

4. Remove the remote control from the igni- tion lock, refer to page 58.

Sport automatic transmission* 1. Shift transmission into position P with the

vehicle stopped.

2. Press the Start/Stop button.

3. Firmly apply the handbrake.

4. Remove the remote control from the igni- tion lock, refer to page 58.

Before driving into a car wash The vehicle can roll if you proceed according to the following steps:

1. With comfort access: insert the remote con- trol into the ignition lock.

2. Depress brake pedal.

3. Shift into transmission position N.

4. switch off the engine.

Transmission position P will be engaged:

> automatically after approx. 30 minutes

> if you remove the remote control from the ignition lock

D ri

vi n

g

60

Handbrake The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it brakes the rear wheels.

Indicator lamp The indicator lamp lights up, and a sig- nal also sounds when starting off. The handbrake is applied.

Indicator lamp for Canadian models.

Applying The lever locks in position automatically.

Releasing

Pull slightly upwards, press the button and lower the lever.

If exceptional circumstances should make it necessary to apply the handbrake

while the vehicle is in motion, do not pull it too firmly. In doing so, continuously press the but- ton of the handbrake lever. Otherwise, too firm an application of the handbrake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the rear of the vehicle to swerve.<

To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak- ing action, occasionally engage the hand-

brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable. The brake lamps do not light up when the hand- brake is applied.<

Manual transmission

When shifting into 5th/6th gear, press the gearshift lever toward the right, otherwise

an inadvertent shift into 3rd or 4th gear could lead to engine damage.<

Reverse gear Select only when the vehicle is stationary. Press the gearshift lever to the left, overcoming a slight resistance.

Sport automatic transmission* In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can also shift manually with Steptronic, refer to page 61.

You can also choose between two driving pro- grams: Normal or Sport, refer to Dynamic Driv- ing Control.

Transmission positions P R N D M/S +

Displays in instrument cluster

P, R, N, D, S1 through S6, M1 through M6

C o

n tr

o ls

61

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The transmission mode and the currently selected gear are displayed.

Engaging transmission position > Do not leave the transmission position P

until the engine is running: interlock.

> With the vehicle stationary, depress the brake pedal before shifting out of P or N; otherwise the shift command will not be executed: shiftlock.

To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a driving position,

maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start.<

Engaging N, D, R

Briefly press the selector lever in the desired direction, beyond a resistance point if neces- sary. Press button 1 simultaneously out of P or into R.

The engaged transmission position is also dis- played on the selector lever.

The selector lever immediately returns to the center position when released.

Engaging P

Press button P.

R Reverse Select only when the vehicle is stationary.

P Park Select only when the vehicle is stationary. The rear wheels are locked.

P is engaged automatically as soon as you switch off the engine unless N is

engaged and with comfort access the remote control is inserted in the ignition lock, refer to Before driving into a car wash, page 59.<

N Neutral You can select N in car washes, for example. The vehicle can roll.

N remains engaged even after the engine is switched off whenever you leave the

remote control in the ignition lock. This function is useful, for example, in automatic car washes, refer to page 59.<

D Drive, automatic position Position for normal vehicle operation. All forward gears are available.

Kick-down Kick-down enables you to achieve maximum performance. Press the accelerator pedal beyond the increased resistance at full throttle.

Sport program and manual mode M/S

Press selector lever toward the left from trans- mission position D: The sport program is activated and S1 through S6 is displayed in the instrument cluster.

D ri

vi n

g

62

This position is recommended for a perfor- mance-oriented driving style.

When the selector lever is briefly moved for- ward or back, the manual mode is activated and the Steptronic shifts gear. The instrument clus- ter shows M1 through M6.

Upshifts and downshifts are only carried out at a suitable engine and vehicle speed, e.g. a down- shift is not carried out at excessively high engine speeds. The selected gear is briefly dis- played in the instrument cluster, followed by the current gear.

To resume automatic mode, press the selector lever to the right.

Shift paddles on steering wheel You can also shift manually with two shift pad- dles on the steering wheel. The shift paddles allow you to shift gears quickly, as both hands can remain on the steering wheel.

> When you use the shift paddles on the steering wheel to shift gears in automatic mode, the gearshift system switches into the manual mode.

> If you do not shift with the shift paddles and do not accelerate for a certain time, the sys- tem switches into the automatic mode again when the selector lever is in D.

> To shift up: pull one of the shift paddles.

> To shift down: press one of the shift pad- dles.

Dynamic Driving Control The Dynamic Driving Control makes it possible for your BMW to react in an even more perfor- mance-oriented manner at the push of a button:

> The speed range of the engine is optimally utilized.

> Gearshifts are faster.

> The engine responds more spontaneously to accelerator pedal movements.

> The steering will operate in an even sportier mode.

> In the automatic mode, the 6th gear is not engaged.

Activating system

Press the SPORT button. The LED in the button lights up and SPORT is displayed in the instrument cluster.

Deactivating system > Press the SPORT button again

> Engage reverse gear

> Switch off engine

The LED in the button and SPORT in the instru- ment cluster go out.

Manually unlocking and locking transmission lock In case of a power failure, e.g. when the battery is drained or disconnected, or an electrical fault, manually release the transmission lock, as oth- erwise the rear wheels are blocked and the vehicle cannot be towed.

Only manually release the transmission lock for towing and firmly apply the handbrake before- hand so that the vehicle cannot roll. Reengage

C o

n tr

o ls

63

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

the transmission lock after parking the vehicle at its destination.

Releasing 1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.

2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever.

3. Reach into the trim-piece opening, arrow 1, and firmly pull the trim piece upward, arrow 2.

4. Remove cover over the opening, refer to 5.

5. Insert a screwdriver from the onboard tool kit, refer to page 223, into the opening, arrow 1.

6. Pull the screwdriver toward the rear until it is heard to engage, arrow 2, and leave it inserted in the opening. The transmission lock is released.

Locking 1. Pull out the screwdriver upward.

The transmission lock is locked again.

2. Reinstall the cover and the trim piece.

Information on jump starting and towing from page 228.

Turn signals/ headlamp flasher

1 High beams

2 Headlamp flasher

3 Turn signals

Using turn signals Move the lever beyond the resistance point.

To switch off manually, only press the lever to the resistance point.

Atypically rapid flashing of the indicator lamp indicates the failure of a turn signal

lamp.<

Signaling briefly Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there as long as you wish to signal.

D ri

vi n

g

64

Triple turn signal activation Press the lever to the resistance point; the turn signals flash three times.

You can activate or deactivate this function.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Triple turn signal" and press the controller.

Triple turn signal is activated.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Wiper system

1 Switching on wipers

2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe

3 Activating/deactivating rain sensor

4 Cleaning windshield, headlamps and BMW Night Vision camera*

5 Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level

Switching on wipers Pull the lever upward, arrow 1.

The lever automatically returns to its initial posi- tion when released.

Normal wiper speed Press once. The system reverts to operation in the intermit- tent mode whenever the vehicle is stationary.

Fast wiper speed Briefly press twice or press beyond the resis- tance point. The system reverts to operation at normal speed whenever the vehicle is stationary.

Rain sensor Wiper operation is controlled automatically as a function of the rain intensity. The rain sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior rearview mirror.

Activating rain sensor

Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but- ton lights up.

Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity level Turn the knurled wheel 5.

C o

n tr

o ls

65

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Deactivating rain sensor Press the buttonagain, arrow 3. The LED goes out.

Deactivate the rain sensor when passing through an automatic car wash. Failure to

do so could result in damage caused by undes- ired wiper activation.<

Cleaning windshield, headlamps and BMW Night Vision camera* Pull the lever, arrow 4:

The system sprays washer fluid against the windshield and activates the wipers for a brief period.

With the vehicle lighting switched on, the head- lamps and the BMW Night Vision camera are also cleaned simultaneously at suitable inter- vals.

Do not use the washers if there is any danger that the fluid will freeze on the

windshield. If you do so, your vision could be obscured. To avoid freezing, use a washer fluid antifreeze, refer to Washer fluid. Do not use washers when the washer fluid reservoir is empty, as this will damage the washer pump.<

Windshield washer nozzles Both windshield washer nozzles are automati- cally heated with the engine running or the igni- tion switched on.

Washer fluid Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable. For this reason, keep it away from ignition

sources and store only in the closed original container out of reach of children. Otherwise, there is the danger of bodily injury. Always fol- low the instructions for use provided on the containers.<

Filler neck for washer fluid

All washer nozzles are supplied from one reser- voir.

Fill with water and if required with a washer antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom- mendations.

In order to maintain the mixture ratio, mix the washer fluid before filling.<

Capacity Capacity approx. 5.3 US quarts/5 liters.

Cruise control*

The concept The cruise control is available for use at speeds of approx. 20 mph/30 km/h and higher. The vehicle stores and maintains the speed that you set using the lever mounted on the steering col- umn. To maintain the specified speed, the sys- tem brakes if the engine braking effect is not sufficient on a downhill grade. Speed can drop on uphill grades if the engine output is insuffi- cient.

Do not use the cruise control under driv- ing conditions that do not permit a con-

stant speed, e.g. when driving on winding roads, in heavy traffic or in poor road conditions such as snow, rain, ice, and loose road surface. Otherwise, you could lose control of the vehicle and cause an accident.<

D ri

vi n

g

66

One lever for all functions

1 Maintaining, storing and increasing speed

2 Maintaining speed, storing speed, and decelerating

3 Interrupting and deactivating system

4 Resuming stored speed

Maintaining, storing and increasing speed Press lever to resistance point, arrow 1: The system maintains and stores the current vehicle speed. The display 1 in the speedome- ter, see below, indicates this regulated speed. Every time you press the lever, the vehicle's speed increases by roughly 1 mph/1 km/h.

Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it: The vehicle accelerates without pressure on the accelerator pedal. The system maintains and stores your current speed as soon as you release the lever.

Maintaining speed, storing speed, and decelerating Pull the lever, arrow 2: Functions are the same as 1; the speed is reduced.

Interrupting system Press the lever up or down, arrow 3.

the display 1 in the speedometer changes color.

In addition, the system is automatically inter- rupted:

> when you brake, even with the handbrake

> when you shift very slowly and when you shift the automatic transmission into the idling or N position

> when DTC is activated or DSC is deacti- vated

Resuming stored speed Press button 4: The vehicle accelerates to and maintains the stored speed.

Deactivating system > Press the lever up or down twice, arrow 3

> Switch off the ignition

The speed stored in the memory is deleted.

Displays in instrument cluster

1 Stored speed

2 Selected speed is displayed briefly

Active cruise control* With active cruise control you can select a desired speed which is then automatically maintained when driving on open roadways and is varied to maintain a selected distance setting to slower moving vehicles ahead.

Active cruise control represents a technological advance over the familiar cruise control and is a welcome relief from the constant adjustment of speed that can accompany driving in traffic on freeways or other high-speed thoroughfares.

C o

n tr

o ls

67

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Especially on longer trips and in traffic conges- tion, the system can reduce fatigue and tension, while increasing your enjoyment of driving. Please use it safely and responsibly.

In addition to holding a steady cruising speed, if you encounter slower vehicles ahead, active cruise control will, within limits, adjust your vehicle's speed automatically so that you can flow with the traffic without having to make con- stant adjustments. If, for example, while cruis- ing at the selected speed, you begin to approach a slower vehicle ahead of you in the same lane, the system will reduce your vehicle's speed to the same as that of the vehicle ahead to maintain your selected distance setting. You can vary the following distance, which will vary with speed. Based on your selected distance setting, the system automatically decreases the throttle setting and lightly applies the brakes if necessary. In addition, if the vehicle ahead of you slows to a complete stop, the system can follow this action within the given scope and can also accelerate from a complete stop if the vehicle ahead of you drives off again shortly thereafter. During braking, your vehicle brake lamps will automatically illuminate to alert a fol- lowing driver to take action. In addition, it may be necessary for your vehicle to downshift the automatic transmission to maintain the dis- tance setting selected. As soon as the road in front of you has no moving vehicles, the system will accelerate to your desired speed. This set speed is also maintained on downhill grades, however the vehicle speed can drop below the set speed when driving uphill if the engine out- put is not sufficient.

Active cruise control cannot detect stop signs, red lights, or any object that is

stopped or is blocking the road. Active cruise control is not and must not be used as a collision avoidance/warning system. Since this active cruise control system is a new technology and operates differently from con- ventional cruise control systems which you may be accustomed to, it is necessary that you read all of the pages relating to this system before use. Carefully read and observe the information

on the system limitations beginning on page 71 to obtain a good command of the system and its range of applications.<

Brake pedal feel When the system brakes and you also depress the brake pedal, a somewhat different braking feel results.

Professional* navigation system If a navigation DVD is in the drive, refer to page 132, within limits the system adjusts the accelerating and braking behavior of the vehicle to the road you are driving on.

To ensure that the system is informed of the current course of the road, always use

the latest navigation DVD if possible.<

When the vehicle position is unknown, e.g. when you leave the map area, this influence of the navigation system is not available.

Applications Please try the system first during sparse traffic and clear road conditions so that you can get used to the system. After you have experience and understand the system, only then use it during normal traffic.

As with conventional cruise control systems, active cruise control in no way reduces or sub- stitutes for the driver's own personal experi- ence, responsibility, alertness and awareness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise control- ling the vehicle. The driver should decide when to use the system on the basis of road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions. Active cruise control is intended for use on highway-type roadways where traffic is moving relatively smoothly as well as in slow-moving traffic. Do not use the system in city driving; in complex driving situations; heavy traffic such as during rush hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or roads with sharp curves such as high- way off-ramps; during inclement weather such as snow, strong rain or fog; or when entering interchanges, service/parking areas or toll booths. It is also important to regulate your

D ri

vi n

g

68

vehicle's speed and distance setting within applicable legal limits. Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if necessary, espe- cially when the system is actively following a vehicle in front of you. Otherwise, driving condi- tions can result which lead to a violation of the law or elevated risk of an accident.

The minimum initial activation speed is 20 mph/ 30 km/h, and the maximum speed is 110 mph/ 180 km/h. However, you can also activate the system while stopped, refer to While stopped, page 70.

One lever for all functions

1 Storing and increasing desired speed

2 Storing and reducing desired speed

3 Interrupting, refer to page 69, or deactivat- ing system, refer to page 70

4 Activating stored desired speed and dis- tance, refer to page 69, or driving off, refer to While stopped, page 70

5 Selecting distance to vehicle driving ahead, refer to page 69.

Storing current speed Tap the lever, arrow 1, or briefly pull it, arrow 2.

The system stores the current vehicle speed. It is indicated on the speedometer and briefly in the instrument cluster.

Increasing desired speed Press or tap the lever to the resistance point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is dis- played. The speed then displayed is stored and achieved on a clear road.

> Each time the lever is tapped to the resis- tance point, the desired speed is increased by approx. 1 mph/1 km/h.

> Each time the lever is tapped beyond the resistance point, the desired speed increases to the next fives place of the mph speedometer display or the next tens place of the km/h speedometer display.

Reducing desired speed Pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is displayed.

These functions are operated in the same man- ner as increasing your desired speed.

C o

n tr

o ls

69

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Selecting distance

> Briefly press rocker switch downward: Increase distance.

> Briefly press rocker switch upward: Reduce distance.

The selected distance is displayed in the instru- ment cluster.

Use good judgment to select the appro- priate following distance, given road con-

ditions, traffic, applicable laws and State driving recommendations for safe following distance. Otherwise, a violation of the law or risk of an accident could result.<

Interrupting cruise control

Press the lever upward or downward, and with the vehicle stopped also depress the brake pedal. The marking in the speedometer changes color and the distance indicator goes out.

In addition, the system is automatically inter- rupted:

> when you apply the vehicle brakes

> when you shift the transmission

> when DTC is activated or DSC is deacti- vated

> when DSC comes on

> when you apply the handbrake

> when you release the safety belt and open the driver's door with the vehicle stopped

> when the system does not recognize any objects for an extended period of time, e.g. on infrequently traveled roads without a shoulder or guard rails, or if the radar sensor is covered with dirt, refer to page 71

If the system is interrupted, then it is nec- essary for the driver to actively intervene

by braking and steering. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident.<

Resuming stored desired speed and distance

While driving Press button 4. The displays appear in the instrument cluster.

Distance 1

Distance 2

Distance 3

Distance 4 This distance is always set when you activate the system.

D ri

vi n

g

70

While stopped Before leaving the vehicle with the engine running, engage position P of the auto-

matic transmission and apply the handbrake. Otherwise the vehicle can roll.<

If a detected vehicle in front of you brakes to a complete stop and your vehicle has also been braked to a complete stop by the system:

> If the vehicle in front of you drives off while the marking 1 for the desired speed in the speedometer is green, your vehicle will accelerate without you having to do any- thing.

> If the vehicle in front of you drives off while the marking 1 is orange, you briefly depress the accelerator pedal or press button 4. Rolling bars in the distance indicator 3 mean that the vehicle in front of you has driven off.

If you are stopped behind a vehicle with the brake pedal depressed and the system is inter- rupted or deactivated:

1. Press button 4 to activate a stored desired speed or select a desired speed with the lever, arrow 1 or arrow 2.

2. Release the brake pedal.

3. If the vehicle in front of you drives off, briefly depress the accelerator pedal or press button 4.

Deactivating system > Press the lever upward or downward twice

while driving.

> When stopped, do the same with the brake pedal depressed.

> Switch off the ignition.

The displays turn off, and the stored desired speed and distance are deleted.

Displays in instrument cluster

1 Stored desired speed

> Green: the system is active.

> Orange: the system is interrupted.

2 Lights up yellow: vehicle detected ahead Display also used for warnings, please read all information on warnings

3 Selected distance to vehicle ahead The indicator lights up as soon as the sys- tem is activated

The bars roll: the vehicle in front of you has driven off

4 Brief display of stored desired speed

If the display --- mph/--- km/h appears briefly, the conditions necessary for oper-

ation may currently not be met.<

Warning lamps

The indicator 2 continuously flashes yellow. The prerequisites for operating the system are no longer met, e.g. as a result of ABS or DSC interven-

tions. The system brakes until you actively take over.

The indicator 2 flashes red; a sig- nal sounds. The system indicates that you must brake and/or maneuver the vehicle yourself. The system can-

not automatically restore the distance to the vehicle driving ahead. However, this display cannot relieve the driver of the responsibility for adjusting the desired speed and driving style to the traffic conditions.

C o

n tr

o ls

71

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Radar sensors

1 Long-range sensor

2 Location of the short-range sensors behind the bumper

Heavy rain and also dirt, snow or ice can limit the detection of vehicles ahead. If needed, clean the radar sensor under the front bumper as well as the bumper area covering the short range sensors. When doing so, be particularly careful in removing layers of snow and ice. Do not apply adhesive labels etc. in the area of the short-range sensors.

If the sensor is not aligned properly, e.g. due to damage, the active cruise control cannot be activated.

System limitations

As with conventional cruise control sys- tems, active cruise control in no way

diminishes or substitutes for the driver's own personal responsibility, alertness and aware- ness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise controlling the vehicle. The driver should decide when to use the system on the basis of road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions. Active cruise control is intended for use on free- way-type roadways where traffic is moving rel- atively smoothly. Do not use this system in city driving; in complex driving situations; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or roads with sharp curves such as highway off-ramps; during inclement weather such as snow, strong rain or fog; or when entering interchanges, service/ parking areas or toll booths. It is also important to regulate your vehicle's speed and distance setting within applicable legal limits. Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if nec- essary, especially when the system is actively following a vehicle in front of you.<

Always remember that the range and abil- ity of the system do have physical limita-

tions. For example, the system may not detect vehicles driving ahead if they suddenly brake heavily in stop-and-go traffic during accelera- tion. The system will not apply the brakes or slow your vehicle when a very slow-moving vehicle, stopped vehicle or stationary object is in the lane ahead of you, for example when approaching a traffic light or parked vehicle or when a vehicle is stalled in your lane. Also, the system does not react to oncoming traffic, pedestrians or other types of potential traffic such as a rider on a horseback. It is also possible that the system may not detect smaller moving objects such as motorcycles or bicycles. Be especially alert when encountering any of these situations as the system will neither automati- cally brake, nor provide a warning to you. Also, be aware that every decrease in the distance setting allows your vehicle to come closer to a vehicle in front of you and requires a heightened amount of alertness.<

D ri

vi n

g

72

The system cannot allow the vehicle to drive off automatically in situations that make driving off considerably more difficult, e.g. on steep uphill grades, with a heavy trailer or before raised areas in the road.

Near radio astronomy stations, the system radar is deactivated at speeds under 20 mph/ 30 km/h due to legal regulations.

Be certain to interrupt the system when you pull into an exit lane for a highway

offramp.<

Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner on a freeway may cause a delay in the system's reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause the system to react to a vehicle actually in the lane next to you. Always be ready to take action or apply the brakes if necessary.

In addition, the system is interrupted whenever the driver applies the vehicle

brakes, shifts the transmission from drive/D to neutral/N, or deactivates DSC. After any inter- ruption, the system will no longer automatically activate the vehicle brakes, which means the driver must intervene and resume manual brak- ing. You should then reactivate the system only when you are fully aware of the prior speed and distance settings.<

Active cruise control may brake when you reduce the stored desired speed; however, the driver must constantly monitor traffic and inter- vene if necessary.

When you switch off the engine or ignition, active cruise control is fully switched off, too, and any settings you have selected are can- celed.

Unexpected lane change

If a vehicle in front of you is behind a stopped vehicle and unexpectedly changes lanes, you must react yourself, as the system does not react to stopped vehicles.

Swerving vehicles

When a vehicle swerves out of adjacent lanes into your lane, the system does not detect the vehicle until it is completely in your lane.

When a vehicle ahead suddenly swerves into your lane, the system may not be able

to restore the selected distance automatically. This also applies to great differences in speed between your vehicle and vehicles ahead, e.g. when quickly approaching a truck. Once the system has established that a vehicle is indeed in front of you, it will indicate that you must brake and/or maneuver the vehicle yourself. Take action yourself, otherwise there is a risk of an accident.<

C o

n tr

o ls

73

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Behavior in curves

If the selected desired speed for a curve is too high, the system reduces the speed within a curve. However, it cannot detect curves in advance. Therefore, select a suitable speed at the start of a curve.

Because of the limited range of the system, it is possible that in curves or on the peaks and val- leys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be rec- ognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to the driver to select a speed that is prudent in view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.

In approaching a curve, it is possible that active cruise control might react briefly to a vehicle in the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either case, you can choose to overcome the deceler- ation by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.

Driver interventions and your responsibility

Anytime the driver presses down on the accelerator pedal, any automatic braking

action by the system is interrupted and the dis- tance indicator turns off until the pedal is fully released. As soon as you fully release the accel- erator, the system will once again control your cruising speed and distance setting. While driv- ing with the system activated, resting your foot on the accelerator pedal will cause the system not to brake even if necessary. Be certain that floormats or other objects on the vehicle floor do not interfere with movement of the accelera- tor pedal.<

While active cruise control is capable of braking your vehicle automatically when

you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is important to be aware that the ability of the sys- tem to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g. when you reduce your desired speed sharply. It uses only a portion of braking system capacity and does not utilize the full capacity of the vehi- cle braking system. Therefore, the system can- not decrease your speed due to large differ- ences in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Example: when you approach a vehicle traveling at a much lower speed than your own speed such as approaching a toll booth or when a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you at close range.<

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

74

Everything under control

Odometer, outside temperature display, clock

1 Time, outside temperature, and date

2 Odometer and trip odometer

3 Press button:

> with ignition switched on, trip odometer is reset

> with ignition switched off, time, outside temperature and odometer are briefly displayed

From radio readiness, the outside temperature and the time are displayed.

To request the date: Press the CHECK button in the turn signal lever, refer to page 80.

To set time and date, refer to page 82.

You can set the unit of measure 7 or 6 on the Control Display, refer to Units of measure on page 84.

Outside temperature warning If the display drops to +377/+36, a signal sounds and a warning lamp lights up. A mes- sage appears on the Control Display. There is an increased danger of ice.

Ice can form even at temperatures above +377/+36. Drive carefully, especially

on bridges and shaded roadways; otherwise, your risk of accident increases.<

Tachometer

Avoid engine speeds in the white-striped advance warning field, arrow 1, if possible.

Be sure to avoid engine speeds in the red warn- ing field, arrow 2. At high revs in this range, the flow of fuel is interrupted to protect the engine.

Coolant temperature Should the coolant and therefore the engine become too hot, a warning lamp lights up. In addition, a message appears on the Control Display.

Checking coolant level, refer to page 220.

C o

n tr

o ls

75

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Engine oil temperature*

During normal operation, the engine oil temper- ature is between approx. 1607/706 and approx. 3407/1706. If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes- sage is shown on the Control Display.

Fuel gauge

Fuel tank capacity: approx. 18.5 US gal/ 70 liters, including the reserve capacity of approx. 2.6 US gal/10 liters. You can find infor- mation on refueling on page 208.

If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period, when you are driving in mountainous areas, for example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.

Reserve After the reserve quantity has been reached, a message briefly appears on the Control Display; the cruising range is shown in the computer. Below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km, the message remains on the Control Display.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Computer

Displays in instrument cluster

Press the button on the turn signal lever.

The following information is displayed in the specified order:

> Cruising range

> Average speed

> Average fuel consumption

> No information

Cruising range Displays the estimated cruising range available with the remaining fuel. The range is projected based on the driving style over the last 20 miles/ 30 km.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Average speed Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine switched off are not included in the calculations of average speed.

To reset the average speed: press the BC but- ton in the turn signal lever for approx. 2 sec- onds.

Average fuel consumption The average fuel consumption is calculated for the time during which the engine is running.

To reset the average fuel consumption: press the BC button in the turn signal lever for approx. 2 seconds.

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

76

For different routes You can display the average speed and average consumption for two different routes on the Control Display, refer to the following and to Trip computer.

Displays on Control Display You can also call up the computer via iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the right to open "Navigation". Without navigation system*: open "Car Data".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Onboard info" and press the con- troller.

> Estimated time of arrival at destination and remaining distance:

> Entering a distance manually in the com- puter, see below.

> Entering a destination in the navigation system*, refer to page 132.

> Cruising range

> Average speed

> Average fuel consumption

Resetting values You can reset the values for average speed and average fuel consumption:

1. Select the desired menu item and press the controller.

2. Press the controller again to confirm.

Entering a distance manually 1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the

controller.

2. Turn the controller to select the distance to your destination. If necessary, hold it against a slight resistance to enter a greater difference.

3. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The distance is automatically predetermined during the destination guidance of the naviga- tion system*.

Trip computer The trip computer is suitable for a vacation trip, for example.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Open "Navigation". Without navigation system*: open "Car Data".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

C o

n tr

o ls

77

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

4. Select "Trip computer" and press the con- troller.

> Departure time

> Driving time

> Distance traveled

> Average speed

> Average fuel consumption

Switching trip computer on/off and resetting all values:

1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

2. Select the desired menu item and press the controller.

Display options You can display the computer or the trip com- puter in the assistance window.

1. Move the controller to the right to change to the assistance window and press the con- troller.

2. Select a menu item:

> "Onboard info"

> "Trip computer".

3. Press the controller.

Service requirements

The remaining driving distance and the date for the next maintenance are displayed briefly with the ignition switched on.

Your BMW Service Advisor can deter- mine your vehicle's current service

requirements by reading out the data stored in the remote control.<

Additional information You can view more detailed information by using the Control Display, for operating princi- ple refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.

4. Select "Service" and press the controller.

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

78

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Status" and press the controller.

The display shows a list of selected service and maintenance procedures, as well as legally mandated official inspections.

You can request more detailed information on every entry.

Select the entry and press the controller.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Symbols No service is currently required.

The deadline for service or an official inspection is approaching. Please

arrange a service appointment.

The service deadline has already passed.

Entering deadlines for legally required inspections* Make sure the date on the Control Display is set correctly, refer to page 83; otherwise, the effec- tiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.

4. Select "Service" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Status" and press the controller.

7. Select "State inspection" and press the controller.

8. Select "Set service date" and press the controller. The month is selected.

C o

n tr

o ls

79

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

10. Press the controller to apply the setting. The year is selected.

11. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

12. Press the controller to apply the setting. The date entry is stored.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Check Control

The concept The Check Control monitors functions in the vehicle and issues a message if there is a mal- function in the monitored systems. A Check Control message of this kind includes indicator or warning lamps in the instrument cluster, pos- sibly an acoustic signal, and text messages at the bottom of the Control Display.

Indicator and warning lamps

The indicator and warning lamps can light up in different combinations and colors.

This symbol means that a Check Control message has been generated. The symbol remains visible even if the Check Control mes- sage has been hidden after a short time. The combinations of warning lamps and text mes- sages are stored and can be viewed later, also refer to page 80.

Explanatory text messages

Text messages at the bottom edge of the Con- trol Display explain the meaning of the indicator and warning lamps displayed.

You can display supplementary information regarding most Check Control messages, e.g. as to the cause of a malfunction and corre- sponding actions to be taken, see below.

In urgent cases, this information will be shown as soon as the corresponding lamp lights up.

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

80

To exit the displayed information: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Hiding Check Control messages

Press the CHECK button in the turn signal lever.

Some Check Control messages are displayed until the malfunctions have been rectified. They cannot be hidden. If a number of these malfunc- tions occur simultaneously, they are displayed in succession.

Other messages are automatically hidden after approx. 20 seconds, but remain stored.

Displaying stored Check Control messages 1. Press the button longer:

The first stored message is displayed.

2. Press the button: A new message appears each time you press the button.

Displaying supplementary information iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Info sources" is selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "Service" is selected and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Check Control messages" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select a message and press the controller.

To exit from the menu immediately: Select the arrow and press the controller.

C o

n tr

o ls

81

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Displaying the urgency of malfunctions

Depending on the equipment, the stored Check Control messages are also displayed with the following symbols:

No malfunctions detected in the moni- tored systems.

Malfunctions detected in the monitored systems. Depending on the malfunction, supplementary information is shown on the Control Display.

The symbols also indicate the status of the ser- vice requirements display, refer to page 77.

Displays after completion of trip Malfunction reports generated during the trip are shown consecutively when you switch off the ignition.

Before the display disappears, you can display the messages once again. Press the CHECK button for approx. 2 seconds. If several mes- sages are present, you can press the CHECK button repeatedly.

The display:

> turns off automatically after a brief period

> can be turned off at any time by pressing the CHECK button again for approx. 2 sec- onds

Speed limit You can enter a speed and a Check Control message indicates when you have reached this speed. This enables you, for example, to receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in an urban area. You are only warned of reaching this speed a second time if your vehicle speed falls below it again by at least 3 mph/5 km/h.

Displaying, setting or changing limit iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Open "Navigation". Without navigation system*: open "Car Data".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.

5. Select the speed value and press the con- troller.

6. Turn the controller to set the limit. If neces- sary, hold it against a slight resistance to enter a greater difference.

7. Press the controller to apply the setting. The limit is automatically switched on.

Applying your current speed as limit Select "Select current speed" and press the controller. The system applies your current speed as the limit.

Activating limit Select "On" and press the controller.

The limit is automatically switched on.

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

82

Stopwatch iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Open "Navigation". Without navigation system*: open "Car Data".

3. Select "Car Data" and press the controller.

4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control- ler.

Starting, stopping, or resetting > Select "Start" and press the controller.

The stopwatch starts at the displayed time.

> Select "Reset" and press the controller. The stopwatch is reset and it restarts if it was running beforehand.

> Select "Stop" and press the controller. This stops the timer.

Taking an intermediate time reading Select "Interim time" and press the controller. The interim time appears below the ongoing primary stopwatch count.

All of the other functions remain available even while the stopwatch is running. The

stopwatch continues to operate in the back- ground.<

Settings on Control Display iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button once or twice until the start menu appears.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

Setting time 1. Turn the controller until "Time / Date" is

selected and press the controller.

2. Move the controller once to the front if nec- essary to change to the first field from the top.

C o

n tr

o ls

83

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

3. Turn the controller until "Time" is selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "Set time" is selected and press the controller.

Making settings 1. Turn the controller to set the hours and

press the controller.

2. Turn the controller to set the minutes and press the controller.

The changed time is stored.

Activating hour signal* You will hear three tones just before the top of each hour.

Select "Hour memo" and press the controller. The hour signal is activated.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Setting 12h/24h format 1. Select "Time format" and press the control-

ler.

2. Select the desired format and press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Setting date 1. Select "Date" and press the controller.

2. Select "Set date" and press the controller. The first section of the date display is selected, in this case the month.

3. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

4. Press the controller to apply the setting. The next adjustment is selected.

5. Make the remaining adjustments. After the last adjustment, the date is stored.

Setting date format 1. Select "Date format" and press the control-

ler.

2. Select the desired format and press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Brightness of Control Display The brightness is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. However, you can change the base setting.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

E ve

ry th

in g

u nd

er c

o n

tr o

l

84

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Display settings" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Brightness" is selected and press the controller.

6. If necessary, move the controller to the right to select "Display".

7. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Units of measure You can change the units of measure for fuel consumption, distances, temperature and pressure.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Language / Units" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Units" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select the menu item to be set.

7. Press the controller.

8. Select the desired unit of measure and press the controller.

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

Language on Control Display iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Language / Units" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Text language" and press the con- troller. You can select a different language for the text displays.

7. Select the desired language and press the controller.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

C o

n tr

o ls

85

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Technology for comfort, convenience and safety

PDC Park Distance Control*

The concept The PDC assists you when you are parking. Acoustic signals and an optical display* alert you to the approach of an object from behind your vehicle. To measure the distance, there are four ultrasonic sensors in each bumper. The range of these sensors is approx. 7 ft/2 m. However, an acoustic warning first sounds for the sensors at the front and at the two rear cor- ners at approx. 24 in/60 cm, and for the center rear sensors at approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.

PDC is a parking aid that can indicate the presence of objects when they are being

approached slowly, as is usually the case when parking. Avoid approaching an object at high speed; otherwise, the physical circumstances could cause the system warning to be activated too late.<

Switching on automatically The system starts to operate approx. one sec- ond after you shift into reverse or move the selector lever into position R with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

Wait this short time before driving off.

Switching on manually

Press the button; the LED lights up.

Switching off manually Press the button again; the LED goes out.

Automatic deactivation After driving approx. 165 ft/50 m or at over approx. 20 mph/30 km/h, the system is switched off and the LED goes out. You can reactivate the system manually as needed.

Signal tones An intermittent signal indicates the distance of the vehicle from an object being approached. Thus, an object detected to the left rear of the vehicle will be indicated by a signal tone from the left rear speaker, etc. As the distance between vehicle and object decreases, the intervals between the tones become shorter. If the distance to the nearest object falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a continuous tone sounds.

An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx. 3 seconds:

> if you remain in front of an object that was only detected by one of the corner sensors

> if you drive parallel to a wall

Malfunction The LED in the button flashes and a message appears on the Control Display. PDC is mal- functioning. Have the system checked.

As a preventive measure, keep the sensors clean and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that they will continue to operate effectively. Do not spray the sensors with high-pressure clean- ers for long periods and maintain a distance of at least 4 in/10 cm to them.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

86

PDC with visual warning* You can also enjoy the option of having the sys- tem show the approach to an object on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already shown there before a signal tone sounds. The setting is stored for the remote control currently in use.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "Vehicle / Tires" is selected and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "PDC" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "PDC display on" and press the con- troller.

The PDC screen is activated.

The display appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC is activated.

System limits Even with PDC, final responsibility for estimating the distance between the

vehicle and any obstacles always remains with the driver. Even when sensors are involved, there is a blind spot in which objects cannot be detected. The system is also subject to the physical limits that apply to all forms of ultra- sonic measurement, such as those encoun- tered with tow bars and trailer couplings, or thin and wedge-shaped objects etc. Low objects already displayed, e.g. curbs, can also disap- pear from the detection area of the sensors again before or after a continuous tone already sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges, cannot be detected. For this reason, drive with care; otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury or property damage. Loud noises from outside and inside the vehicle may prevent you from hearing the PDC signal tone.<

Driving stability control systems Your BMW is equipped with an extended array of systems designed to enhance and maintain vehicle stability under extreme conditions.

ABS Antilock Brake System ABS prevents the wheels from locking during braking. Safe steering response is maintained even during hard braking. This increases active driving safety.

ABS is operational every time you start the engine. For information on safe braking, refer to page 126.

CBC Cornering Brake Control This system provides further enhancements to vehicle stability and steering response when braking while cornering or when braking during a lane change.

C o

n tr

o ls

87

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Electronic brake-force distribution This system controls the brake system's appli- cation pressure at the rear wheels to ensure stable deceleration.

Brake assistant When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system automatically produces the maximum braking force boost and thus helps to achieve the short- est possible braking distance during full brak- ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro- vided by ABS.

Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of the full braking.

Adaptive brake assistant* In conjunction with the active cruise control with the stop-and-go function, the adaptive brake assistant ensures that the brake responds even more quickly during braking with the brake assistant.

DSC Dynamic Stability Control DSC prevents traction loss in the driving wheels when starting off and accelerating. The system also identifies unstable driving conditions, such as a loss of traction at the rear of the vehicle or sliding of the vehicle in its front wheels. In these cases, DSC helps the vehicle safely stay on course within the physical limits by reducing the engine output and by applying the brakes differ- ently in the individual wheels.

The laws of physics cannot be repealed, even with DSC. An appropriate driving

style always remains the responsibility of the driver. Therefore, do not restrict the additional safety margin with a risky driving style, as other- wise there is a risk of an accident.<

Deactivating DSC

Press the button until the DSC indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up, but not for longer than approx. 10 seconds. DTC Dynamic Traction Control and DSC are deactivated together. Interventions promoting stability and forward momentum will no longer be carried out. The stability-promoting intervention of the active steering* is also deactivated, refer to page 93.

A message appears on the Control Display. Please note any supplementary information that appears there.

To support enhanced operating stability, reacti- vate DSC again as soon as possible.

Activating DSC Press the button; the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

For better control The indicator lamp flashes: DSC is controlling the drive forces and brake forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DSC is deactivated.

DTC Dynamic Traction Control DTC is a variant of DSC for special road condi- tions, e.g. uncleared snow-covered roads, that is optimized for forward momentum. The sys- tem ensures maximum forward momentum, but with limited driving stability. Therefore, drive with appropriate caution.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

88

You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC under the following special circumstances:

> When driving on snowy inclines, in slush, or on unplowed, snow-covered road surfaces

> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or when starting off in deep snow or on loose ground

> When driving with snow chains*

Activating DTC

Press the button; the DTC indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

For better control The indicator lamp flashes: DSC is controlling the drive forces and brake forces.

The indicator lamp lights up: DTC is activated.

Deactivating DTC Press the button again; the DTC indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Malfunction in driving stability control systems

The warning lamp for the brake system lights up, together with the indicator lamps for ABS, DSC and Tire Pressure Monitor or Flat Tire Monitor. A mes- sage appears on the Control Display. The driving stability control systems have failed. Conventional braking effi- ciency remains available without limita- tions. While you may continue, you should remember to proceed cau-

tiously and drive defensively while avoiding full

brake applications. The Tire Pressure Monitor or the Flat Tire Monitor is also malfunctioning. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Display of the previously described malfunction on Canadian models.

The DSC indicator lamp lights up. A message appears on the Control Dis- play. A malfunction has occurred in the

DSC and DTC. The stability maintenance func- tions are no longer available. The vehicle remains operational. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

The brake system warning lamp lights up yellow. A message appears on the Control Display. The brake assistant is

defective. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

Display of the previously described malfunction on Canadian models.

Starting assistant The starting assistant enables you to start off conveniently on slopes. The handbrake is not required for this purpose.

1. Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.

2. Release the footbrake and drive off quickly.

The starting assistant holds the vehicle for approx. 2 seconds after releasing the

footbrake. After releasing the footbrake, drive off quickly, otherwise the starting assistant no longer holds the vehicle after approx. 2 seconds and it begins to roll back.<

C o

n tr

o ls

89

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Dynamic Drive*

The concept Dynamic Drive minimizes body roll and opti- mizes vehicle stability during cornering and evasive maneuvers.

Dynamic Drive is based on active stabilizers on the front and rear axles. Suspension compli- ance adapts to suit driving conditions, varying from performance-oriented during cornering to smooth and comfort-oriented when the vehicle is proceeding in a straight line. During vehicle operation, the system continuously runs through closed-loop control cycles lasting only fractions of a second.

The system assumes operational status each time you start the engine.

FTM Flat Tire Monitor*

The concept The Flat Tire Monitor detects a pressure loss in one tire by comparing the speeds of the individ- ual wheels during driving.

In the event of a pressure loss, there is a change in the rolling circumference and therefore the rotation speed of the corresponding wheel. The system detects this change and reports it as a flat tire.

Functional requirement To ensure the reliable signaling of a flat tire, the system must be initialized at the correct tire inflation pressure.

The initialization must be repeated after every correction of the tire inflation pres-

sure and after every tire or wheel change.<

System limits The Flat Tire Monitor cannot indicate sudden severe tire damage caused by outside factors and does not detect a natural, even pressure drop in all four tires.

In the following situations, the system could be delayed or malfunction:

> System has not been initialized

> Driving on snow-covered or slippery roads

> Sporty driving style: slip in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration

> Driving with snow chains*

Initializing system The initialization finishes during driving, which can be interrupted at any time.

When driving resumes, the initialization is auto- matically continued. Do not initialize the system when driving with snow chains*.<

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "FTM" is selected and press the controller.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

90

6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.

7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.

8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

9. Start to drive. The message "resetting FTM " is dis- played.

The initialization is completed during driving.

Indication of a flat tire The warning lamp lights up in red. A message appears on the Control Dis- play. In addition, an acoustic signal

sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation pressure loss.

1. Cautiously reduce the vehicle speed to below 50 mph/80 km/h. Avoid severe brak- ing and steering maneuvers and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Stop driving if the vehicle is no longer equipped with run-flat tires, as it was

when it came from the factory, refer to page 214. Continued driving after a flat tire can result in serious accidents.<

2. Check the air pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity.

If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor

may not have been initialized. The system must then be initialized.<

3. In the event of complete tire pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on run-flat tires, based on the following guide values:

> With low load: 1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km.

> With medium load: 2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons without luggage: approx. 94 miles/150 km.

> With full load: 4 persons, luggage compartment full: approx. 30 miles/50 km.

Drive reservedly and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the

event of pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking dis- tances and altered natural steering charac- teristics. If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and stop at a suitable loca- tion as soon as possible; otherwise, pieces of the tire could become detached and cause an accident. Do not continue driving, but instead contact your BMW center.<

TPM Tire Pressure Monitor*

The concept TPM checks the tire inflation pressure in the four mounted tires. The system reports when the tire inflation pressure has dropped consid- erably in one or several tires.

Functional requirement In order to assure the reliable reporting of a flat tire, the system must have been reset with the correct tire inflation pressure.

Always use wheels with TPM electronics, oth- erwise fault-free operation of the system is not ensured.

Reset the system again after each correc- tion of the tire inflation pressure and after

every tire or wheel change.<

C o

n tr

o ls

91

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

System limits TPM cannot announce sudden serious tire damage caused by external influ-

ences.<

The system does not function properly if it has not been reset, e.g. a flat tire is reported despite correct tire inflation pressures.

The system is inactive and cannot display a flat tire if a wheel has been mounted without TPM electronics, or if TPM is temporarily interfered with by other systems or devices which use the same radio frequency.

Status display on Control Display The tire and system status is indicated by the color of the tires.

TPM takes the fact that the tire pressure changes during driving into account. A correc- tion is only required if requested by TPM with the color.

Green The tire pressure matches the learned set state.

"TPM active" is displayed on the Control Dis- play.

One wheel is yellow Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in the indicated tire. A message appears on the Control Display.

All wheels are yellow Flat tire or a major drop in inflation pressure in several tires. A message appears on the Control Display.

Gray The system cannot detect a flat tire.

Reasons for this can be:

> TPM is being reset

> Temporary interference due to systems or devices which use the same radio fre- quency

> Malfunction

Resetting system Reset the system again after each correc- tion of the tire inflation pressure and after

every tire or wheel change.<

Resetting finishes during driving, which can be interrupted at any time. When driving resumes, resetting is continued automatically.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "TPM" is selected and press the controller.

6. Start the engine, but do not start driving.

7. Select "Reset" and press the controller.

8. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

9. Start to drive. The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting TPM..." is displayed.

After a few minutes of driving, the set tire infla- tion pressures in the tires are applied as the set values to be monitored. Resetting finishes dur-

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

92

ing driving. The tires are shown in green on the Control Display.

If a flat tire is detected during resetting and applying the tire inflation pressures,

all tires are shown in yellow on the Control Dis- play. The message "Tire low!" is displayed.<

Message with low tire inflation pressure

The warning lamp lights up yellow. A message appears on the Control Dis- play. In addition, an acoustic signal

sounds. There is a flat tire or extensive inflation pressure loss.

1. Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/ 80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steer- ing maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.

Stop driving if the vehicle is no longer equipped with run-flat tires, as it was

when it came from the factory, refer to page 214. Continued driving after a flat tire can result in serious accidents.<

2. In the event of complete tire pressure loss, 0 psi/0 kPa, you can estimate the possible distance for continued driving on the basis of the following guide values:

> With low load: 1 to 2 persons without luggage: approx. 155 miles/250 km

> With medium load: 2 persons, cargo bay full, or 4 persons without luggage: approx. 95 miles/150 km

> With full load: 4 persons, luggage compartment full: approx. 30 miles/50 km

Drive reservedly and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. In the event of

pressure loss, vehicle handling changes. This includes reduced tracking stability in braking, extended braking distances and altered natural steering characteristics. If unusual vibrations or loud noises occur while the vehicle is being driven, this can indicate final failure of the damaged tire. Reduce speed and

stop at a suitable location as soon as possible; otherwise, pieces of the tire could become detached and cause an accident. Do not con- tinue driving, but instead contact your BMW center.<

Malfunction The yellow warning lamp flashes and then lights up continuously. The tires are shown in gray on the Control Dis-

play and a message is displayed. No flat tire can be detected.

A message like this is displayed in the following situations:

> In case of a malfunction; have the system checked.

> If a wheels is mounted without TPM elec- tronics.

> If TPM is temporarily interfered with by other systems or devices which use the same radio frequency.

Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems Each tire should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recom- mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla- tion pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys- tem, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure indicator when one or more of your tires are sig- nificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure indicator illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pres- sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi- ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

C o

n tr

o ls

93

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure indicator.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure indicator. When the system detects a malfunction, the indicator will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehi- cle startups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc- tions may occur for a variety of reasons, includ- ing the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction indicator after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to func- tion properly.

Active steering*

The concept The active steering is a system that actively var- ies the steering angle of the front wheels in rela- tion to the steering wheel movements.

When you are driving in the low road speed range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steer- ing angle increases, i.e. the steering becomes very direct. In the higher speed range, on the other hand, the steering angle is reduced more and more. This improves the handling capability of your BMW over the entire speed range.

In critical situations, the system can make tar- geted corrections to the steering angle pro- vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle before the driver intervenes. This stability-pro- moting intervention is deactivated when DSC is switched off, refer to page 87.

Malfunction The warning lamp lights up yellow and a message is shown on the Control Display. The active steering is no

longer operational. At low speed, larger steering wheel movements are required, while the vehi- cle reacts more sensitively to steering wheel movements in the higher road speed range. The stability-promoting intervention can also be deactivated. Proceed cautiously and drive defensively. Have the system checked.

Brake force display

> On the left: normal braking.

> On the right: heavy braking.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

94

Airbags

The following airbags are located under the marked covers:

1 Front airbags

2 Coupe: Head airbags

3 Side airbags

4 Knee airbag

5 Knee airbag

Protective action To ensure that the safety systems con- tinue to provide optimized protection,

please follow the adjustment instructions on page 47.<

The front airbags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro- vide adequate restraint. When needed, the head and side airbags help provide protection in the event of a side impact. The relevant side air- bag supports the side upper body area. The head airbag supports the head. The knee airbag protects the legs from colliding with the cockpit.

The airbags are deliberately not triggered in every impact situation, e.g. less severe acci- dents or rear-end collisions.

Do not apply adhesive materials to the cover panels of the airbags, cover them or

modify them in any other way. Do not attempt to remove the airbag restraint system from the vehicle. Do not modify or tamper with either the wiring or the individual components in the air- bag system. This category includes the uphol- stery in the center of the steering wheel, on the instrument panel, the side trim panels on the doors and on the Coupe, the roof pillars along

with the sides of the headliner. Do not attempt to remove or dismantle the steering wheel. Do not touch the individual components directly after the system has been triggered, because there is a danger of burns. In the event of malfunctions, deactivation, or triggering of the airbag restraint system, have the testing, repair, removal, and disposal of air- bag generators carried out only by a BMW cen- ter or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with appropriately trained personnel and has the required explosives licenses. Otherwise unprofessional attempts to service the system could lead to failure in an emergency or undesired airbag triggering, either of which could result in personal injury.<

Warnings and information on the airbags is also provided on the sun visors.

Automatic deactivation of front passenger airbags The occupation of the seat is detected by eval- uating the impression on the occupied seat sur- face of the front passenger seat. The system correspondingly activates or deactivates the front, knee and side airbags on the front pas- senger side.

The current status of the front passenger airbags, i.e. deactivated or activated, is

indicated by the indicator lamp over the interior rearview mirror, refer to Operating state of front passenger airbags below.<

Before transporting a child in the front passenger seat, read the safety informa-

tion and follow the instructions under Trans- porting children safely, refer to page 56.

C o

n tr

o ls

95

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

The front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side can be deactivated for teenag- ers and adults in certain sitting positions; the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up when this occurs. In these cases, change the sitting position so that the front pas- senger airbags are activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the desired status cannot be produced by changing the sitting position, transport the corresponding person in the rear seat. Do not fit seat covers, seat cushion padding, beaded mats or other items onto the front pas- senger seat unless they are specifically recom- mended by BMW. Do not place objects under the seat which could press against the seat from below. Otherwise, a correct evaluation of the occupied seat surface cannot be ensured.<

Operating state of front passenger airbags

The illustration here shows a possible arrange- ment in the Coupe. With some vehicle equip- ment packages or in the Convertible, the arrangement of the switches and indicator lamps may differ somewhat.

The indicator lamp for the front passenger air- bags indicates the operating status of the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side depending on whether the seat is occu- pied. The indicator lamp shows whether the front passenger airbags are activated or deacti- vated.

> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in a child restraint system intended for the purpose is properly detected on the seat. The front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated.

Most child seats are detected by the sys- tem. Especially the child seats required

by the NHTSA at the time the vehicle is manu- factured. After installing a child seat, make sure that the indicator lamp for the front passenger airbags lights up. This indicates that the child seat has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated.<

> The indicator lamp does not light up when, for example, a correctly seated person of sufficient height is detected on the seat. The front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are activated.

> The indicator lamp does not light up when the seat is empty. But the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are still deactivated.

Operational readiness of airbag system

From radio readiness, refer to page 58, the warning lamp lights up briefly, indicating the operational readiness of the entire airbag sys- tem and the safety belt tensioners.

Airbag system malfunction > Warning lamp does not light up as of radio

readiness.

> Warning lamp lights up continuously.

Have the airbag system checked immedi- ately in case of a malfunction; otherwise,

there is a danger that the airbag system may not respond in the expected manner in an accident despite an impact of corresponding intensity.<

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

96

Convertible: rollover protection system The rollover protection system is automatically activated in the event of an accident or a critical driving situation, extreme inclination on the lon- gitudinal axis, or loss of ground contact. The rollover bars located behind the rear head restraints are deployed within fractions of a sec- ond.

As a supplement to the rollover bar integrated into the windshield frame, the rollover protec- tion system ensures that all vehicle occupants have the necessary headroom.

Always keep the path of movement of the rollover protection system clear.

In less severe accidents, you are protected by the fastened safety belt and, depending on the severity of the accident, the belt tensioner and the multistage airbag restraint system.<

Lowering If the rollover protection system experienced no impact after automatic activation, then it can be lowered again. No tools are necessary for this purpose.

1. Press the release backward and hold in that position.

2. Press the rollover protection unit halfway down from above.

3. Let go of the release.

4. Press the rollover protection unit down until it snaps into place.

5. Use the same procedure for the second roll- over protection unit.

Have the rollover protection system checked after unexpected triggering.

Never move the convertible top when the rollover protection system is raised.

No changes of any nature may be made to the individual components of the rollover protec- tion system and wiring. Work on the rollover protection system may only be performed at a BMW center. Unprofessional attempts to service the system can lead to failure or malfunction. For a system check and to ensure long-term functioning, you must comply with the mainte- nance intervals of the service requirements, refer to page 77.<

Head-Up Display*

The concept With the Head-Up Display, important informa- tion is projected into the driver's field of view, e.g. navigation instructions. This enables you to absorb this information without looking away from the road.

C o

n tr

o ls

97

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Switching on/off Press the button.

1 Navigation instructions

2 Display

> Cruise control

> Active cruise control

> Leaving lane warning

3 Speed

Selecting displays iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Display settings" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Head-Up Display" is selected and press the controller.

6. Change into the second field from the top. Turn the controller until "Head-Up Display" is selected and press the controller.

7. Select desired information of Head-Up Dis- play.

8. Press the controller. The information is shown on the Head-

Up Display.

The settings are stored for the remote key cur- rently in use.

Setting brightness The brightness of the display is automatically adapted to the ambient lighting conditions. However, you can change the base setting. With the low beams switched on, the brightness can also be adjusted with the knurled wheel of the instrument lighting.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Display settings" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Head-Up Display" is selected and press the controller.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

98

6. Change into the second field from the top. Turn the controller until "Brightness" is selected and press the controller.

7. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Notes The visibility of the displays in the Head-Up Dis- play is influenced by:

> Sunglasses with certain polarization filters

> Certain sitting positions

> Objects on the cover of the Head-Up Dis- play

> Wet road surface and unfavorable lighting conditions

If the image is distorted, please have the base setting checked at a BMW center.

Specialized windshield The windshield is a part of the system. The shape of the windshield complies with the requirements of the Head-Up Display to enable a precise display. A film in the windshield pre- vents double images from being displayed. Windshield replacement should be carried out by a BMW center or a workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with cor- respondingly trained personnel.

Care instructions You can find everything you need to know on this topic by consulting the Caring for your vehi- cle brochure.

Only clean the cover of the Head-Up Dis- play with a soft, nonabrasive cloth or with

a display cleaning cloth; otherwise, you may damage it.<

BMW Night Vision*

The concept BMW Night Vision is a driver assistance system that is designed to provide enhanced vision for certain objects at night. This can be especially helpful for detecting people and larger animals. When objects are detected, the driver may be able to take appropriate action sooner. For example, the driver may identify and detect the presence of persons or animals in the road ahead or off to the sides and can be more alert, slow down or stop, blow the horn etc. The driver can decide which actions are appropriate and then react accordingly.

A certain area in front of the vehicle is viewed by an infrared camera and a generated image is shown on the Control Display. The resulting thermal image shows the relative heat radiation of the objects present in the camera's field of view. Warmer objects appear brighter and cooler objects appear darker. Contrast is dependent on the temperature difference between the objects and the background and on the amount of heat radiation of the object itself. As a result, it is quite possible that a per- son is not continually recognizable as a person in shape, since the thermal radiation can be affected by different clothing which blocks heat loss. Objects with little temperature difference to the surrounding area, or little heat radiation are less noticeable, for example in cold weather.

C o

n tr

o ls

99

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Any improvement in detection depends on many factors such as the object size and tem- perature compared to the surroundings, or other nearby objects, the visual recognition skills of the driver, weather conditions, and other factors.

Driving hints With the system active, periodically but briefly, glance at the thermal image on the Control Dis- play to notice objects that could be people or larger animals. The glance should be similar to glancing at the rear view mirror. Do not stare at the image for long periods while driving, as this will remove attention from the road. If you notice an object of interest ahead, be prepared to slow down or stop, blow the horn, or take other appropriate action.

System limits The system is designed to supplement but not replace forward vision through the windshield. The driver is responsible for safe driving at night. BMW Night Vision is not designed to be used as a continuous viewing window for driv- ing at night.

No system, no matter how sophisticated, can operate without limitations. BMW Night Vision operation is subject to physical and environ- mental limitations that will reduce the ability of the system to detect and display a clear thermal image. Some of the situations in which these limitations can occur are:

> on steep hilltops or depressions and in tight curves

> in tunnels, as the contrast is inherently low

> when the camera lens is dirty

> in dense fog, heavy rain or snowfall

> when displaying very hot objects such as transformers, car exhausts etc.

> when the image briefly freezes during nor- mal system adjustment.

BMW Night Vision's potential benefits can be limited by the driving style of the

driver, the size and relative temperature of the detected objects, dirt or contamination on the camera lens, adverse weather like snow, rain or fog, and other factors not mentioned here. It will always be the driver's responsibility to drive at a speed and in a manner that recognizes potential hazards and adjust accordingly. BMW Night Vision is not a substitute or replace- ment for driver responsibility or for accommo- dating the visibility conditions and the traffic sit- uation. The forward view illuminated by the headlamps must always be the basis for making safe driving decisions, otherwise a safety risk will result.<

Activating BMW Night Vision 1. Turn the light switch to position 2 or 3, refer

to page 102.

2. With low beams switched on:

> Press the button. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the location of the button may differ somewhat.

> Press one of the programmable buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 55.

The image will be displayed on the Control Dis- play after a few seconds. Depending on the last mode selected, either the normal or full screen image will be displayed.

T ec

hn o

lo g

y fo

r c o

m fo

rt , c

o n

ve n

ie n

ce a

nd s

af et

y

100

Due to the system's need to adjust periodically, a still image is displayed at certain intervals for fractions of a second. This is normal and not an indication of a problem.

To prevent driving without headlamps, at a speed of more than approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and when dark, the thermal image on the Control Display is only shown when the low beams are on.

Deactivating BMW Night Vision > Press the button.

> Press the button on the steering wheel.

> Press the button.

> Via iDrive, refer to Selecting settings.

Selecting settings iDrive, for explanation of principle, refer to page 16.

1. Activate BMW Night Vision.

2. Press the controller to display the menu items.

3. Select the menu item and press the control- ler:

> "Night Vision off": Deactivate BMW Night Vision.

> "Zoom": At higher speeds, the image is zoomed in.

> "Curve mode": Depending on the steering angle and other parameters, the image sections follow the course of the road to some degree.

> "Full screen": The image is shown on the entire Con- trol Display.

> "Contrast": The contrast of the screen can be adjusted.

> "Brightness": The brightness of the screen can be adjusted.

"Curve mode" can only be activated with the "Zoom" function switched on. With

"Full screen" activated, "Curve mode" and "Zoom" cannot be selected.<

The settings are stored for the remote control currently in use.

To exit the menu: The image will automatically disappear after approx. 5 seconds.

Cleaning camera

The function of the camera may be affected by heavy rain and fog, dirt, snow or ice on the lens. When this occurs, the displayed image on the Control Display may become gray.

To minimize icing, the camera lens is automati- cally heated. However, it may be necessary to clean the camera lens manually under severe weather conditions. When doing so, cautiously remove any debris, ice or snow. To avoid dam-

C o

n tr

o ls

101

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

age to the lens, do not use sharp or abrasive instruments to clean ice, snow, or dirt off the lens.

When the windshield is cleaned with the head- lamps on, the camera lens area is automatically sprayed as well. Refer to page 64.

Leaving lane warning*

The concept This system warns you from a speed of approx. 40 mph/70 km/h when the vehicle is leaving the lane you are currently in on roads with lane limit lines. You feel this due to a slight vibration of the steering wheel. The system does not warn you if you signal before leaving the lane. It is best to use the system on well-developed roads and freeways.

Switching on/off

Press the button on the steering wheel.

> The two lines 1 indicate that the system is activated.

> The two arrows 2 mean that the system has detected one or two lane limit lines from a speed of approx. 40 mph/70 km/h and warns accordingly.

If you activate the system below a speed of approx. 40 mph/70 km/h, a message will appear stating that the system is not active until this speed is reached.

A warning will be canceled:

> after approx. 3 seconds

> if you return to your lane

> if you brake heavily

> if you signal

System limits The leaving lane warning cannot serve as a substitute for your personal judgment in

determining the course of the road. If the system issues a warning, do not move the steering wheel with unnecessary severity, as otherwise you could loose control of the vehi- cle.<

The function of the system may be limited in the following example situations:

> in heavy fog, rain or snowfall

> with worn-away, poorly visible limit lines, or lines that run together or apart or are unclear, e.g. in road construction areas

> when limit lines are covered by snow, ice, dirt or a great deal of water

> in tight curves or on narrow roads

> when limit lines are not white

> when limit lines are covered by objects

> when driving up close behind a vehicle driv- ing ahead

> with bright counter light

> when the windshield is fogged up, dirty or covered with stickers, vignettes etc. in the area of the inside rearview mirror

L am

p s

102

Lamps

Parking lamps/low beams

0 Lights off and daytime running lamps* 1 Parking lamps and daytime running lamps* 2 Low beams and welcome lamps

3 Automatic headlamp control, daytime run- ning lamps*, welcome lamps, Adaptive Head Light* and high-beam assistant*

If you open the driver's door with the ignition switched off, the exterior lighting is automati- cally switched off when the light switch is in position 2 or 3.

Parking lamps In switch position 1, the front, rear and side vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the parking lamps for parking.

The parking lamps drain the battery. Do not leave them switched on for long peri-

ods of time, otherwise it may no longer be pos- sible to start the engine. It is preferable to switch on the roadside parking lamps on one side, refer to page 104.<

Low beams The low beams light up when the light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is on.

Automatic headlamp control In switch position 3, the system activates the low beams and switches them on or off in response to changes in ambient light condi- tions, for instance, in a tunnel, at dawn and dusk and in case of precipitation. Adaptive Head Light* is active. The LED next to the symbol is illuminated when the low beams are on.

You can activate the daytime running lamps, refer to page 103. In the situations named above, the system then automatically switches over to the low beams.

A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be switched on.

The low beams remain on independent of the ambient lighting conditions when you

switch on the fog lamps.<

The automatic headlamp control cannot serve as a substitute for your personal

judgment in determining when the lamps should be switched on in response to ambient lighting conditions. For example, the sensors cannot detect fog of hazy weather. To avoid safety risks, you should always switch on the low beams manually under these conditions.<

Welcome lamps If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3 when parking the vehicle, then when you unlock the vehicle, the parking lamps and interior light- ing remain illuminated for a brief time.

Activating/deactivating welcome lamps iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

C o

n tr

o ls

103

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Welcome light" and press the con- troller.

The welcome lamps are switched on.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Pathway lighting When you activate the headlamp flasher after parking the vehicle and switching off the lamps, the low beams will come on for a brief period. You can set the duration or deactivate the func- tion via iDrive.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Pathway lighting" and press the controller.

7. Turn the controller to select the desired duration.

8. Press the controller to apply the setting.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Daytime running lamps* The daytime running lamps light up in posi- tion 0, 1 and 3. If the light switch remains in position 1, the parking lamps light up after the ignition is switched off.

Activating/deactivating daytime running lamps* 1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Daytime running lamps" and press the controller.

The daytime running lamps are switched on.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

L am

p s

104

Adaptive Head Light*

The concept Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlamp control system that enables better illumination of the road surface. Depending on the steering angle and other parameters, the light from the headlamp follows the course of the road.

Activating Adaptive Head Light With the ignition switched on, turn the light switch into position 3, refer to page 102.

To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Head Light is not active when driving in reverse and points toward the passenger side when the vehicle is stopped.

High beams/ roadside parking lamps

1 High beams

2 Headlamp flasher

3 Roadside parking lamps

Roadside parking lamps, left or right* You also enjoy the option of lighting up just one side of your vehicle when parking:

Switching on After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or down beyond the resistance point, arrow 3.

The roadside parking lamps drain the bat- tery. Do not leave them switched on for

long periods of time, otherwise it may no longer be possible to start the engine.<

Switching off Briefly press the lever in the opposite direction up to the resistance point, arrow 3.

High-beam assistant*

The concept This system automatically switches the high beams on and off. A sensor on the front side of the inside rearview mirror controls the process. The assistant makes sure that the high beams are switched on whenever traffic conditions permit. This relieves you of the burden of con- stantly switching back and forth and simulta- neously provides you with the best possible vis- ibility. Naturally, you can intervene at any time to switch the high beams on and off as usual.

Activating system 1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to

page 102.

2. With the low beams switched on, briefly press the turn signal lever in the high-beam direction.

The indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high-beam assistant is activated. The system

automatically switches between high beams and low beams, reacting to oncoming traffic, vehicles ahead of you, and sufficiently lit areas, e.g. in built-up zones.

C o

n tr

o ls

105

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Manually switching between high beams and low beams If you wish or the situation requires, you can intervene at any time.

> If the high-beam assistant has switched on the high beams, but you wish to use the low beams, just switch on the low beams with the turn signal lever. This deactivates the high-beam assistant. In order to reactivate the system, briefly press the turn signal lever in the high-beam direction.

> If the high-beam assistant has switched on the low beams, but you wish to use the high beams, simply switch on the high beams as usual. This deactivates the system and it is up to you to switch back to low beams. In order to reactivate the system, briefly press the turn signal lever in the high-beam direction.

> When the low beams are on, use the head- lamp flasher as usual.

System limits The high-beam assistant is designed to maximize the amount of time that high

beams can be safely used and to quickly switch back to low beams when traffic approaches. The system cannot completely replace driver intervention when unusual conditions are encountered. For this reason, switch to low beams when circumstances so dictate. Failure to do so can pose a safety risk.<

Below are a few examples of situations in which the system may not react or may only function to a limited degree, requiring personal interven- tion:

> in extremely unfavorable weather condi- tions such as fog or heavy precipitation

> in sensing road users with poor inherent illumination such as pedestrians, cyclists, equestrians, horsedrawn vehicles, railroad or shipping traffic close to the road, and at deer crossings

> in tight curves, on steep crests or dips, with cross-traffic, or with partially hidden oncoming traffic on divided highways

> in poorly illuminated areas and in the pres- ence of highly reflective signs

> in the low speed range

> when the windshield is fogged up, dirty or covered with stickers, decals etc. in the area of the inside rearview mirror

> when the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor on the front side of the inside rearview mir- ror with a cloth slightly moistened with glass cleaner

Moreover, no system can operate without limi- tations. High-beam assistant operation is sub- ject to conditions that may reduce the system's ability to recognize the difference between actual vehicle head lamps or tail lamps and, for example, highly reflective signs, markers, and streetlights. To be on the safe side, the system may periodically interpret these situations as conditions that require low beams. Below are some of the situations in which premature switching to low beams can occur:

> approaching large and/or highly reflective signs

> approaching certain lights, such as drive- way lighting and porch lights

> approaching certain traffic signals

> approaching large reflective markers

In these situations, the system may interpret the above conditions as a vehicle ahead requir- ing a switch to low beams. When the conditions return to normal, the system will reactivate the high beams.

The high-beam assistant cannot replace the driver's responsibility for complying with state laws on high-beam switching or for adapting to visibility and traffic conditions.

Switching off via iDrive iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

L am

p s

106

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Lighting" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "High-beam assistant" and press the controller.

High-beam assistant is switched off.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Fog lamps

First switch on the parking lamps or the low beams. The green indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up when the fog lamps are switched on.

The fog lamps are switched off whenever the high beams are switched on.

If the automatic headlamp control is acti- vated, the low beams will come on auto-

matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<

Instrument lighting

You can control the lighting intensity by using the knurled wheel.

Interior lamps

Control of the interior lamps, footwell lamps, door entry lighting, courtesy lamps* and sill panel lighting* is automatic.

With the courtesy lamps, LED lights are located in the door handles to illuminate the exterior area before the doors.

To protect the battery, all lamps in the vehicle are switched off approx. 15 min-

utes after radio readiness is switched off, refer to Start/Stop button on page 58.<

Switching interior lamps on and off manually Press button 1.

If the interior lamps, footwell lamps, door entry lighting, courtesy lamps and sill panel lighting are to remain switched off continually, press the button for approx. 3 seconds.

C o

n tr

o ls

107

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Reading lamps The reading lamps are beside the interior lamp: You can turn them on and off using buttons 2 located next to the lamps.

C lim

at e

108

Climate

Automatic climate control

1 Air directed toward the windshield and side windows

2 Air for the upper body area, refer to Ventilation on page 112

3 Air to footwell

4 Temperature, left side of passenger compartment

5 Manual air distribution, driver's side

6 Defrosting windows and removing condensation

7 Manual air volume, switching off automatic climate control, residual heat utilization

8 AUTO program

9 Switching cooling function on and off manually

10 Temperature, right side of passenger compartment

11 Manual air distribution, front passenger side

12 Maximum cooling

13 AUC automatic recirculated-air control/ recirculated air mode

14 LED for residual heat utilization and parked-car ventilation system

15 Rear window defroster

C o

n tr

o ls

109

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

16 Air grill for interior temperature sensor please keep clear and unobstructed

The current setting for air distribution is dis- played on the Control Display.

A congenial climate The AUTO program offers the optimum air dis- tribution and air volume for virtually all condi- tions, refer to AUTO program below. Now you only need to select an interior temperature that you find pleasant.

The following sections contain more detailed information on the available setting options.

Most settings are stored for the remote control currently in use, also refer to Personal Profile settings on page 29.

AUTO program The AUTO program handles the adjustment of air volume and air distribution to the windshield and side windows, in the direction of the upper body and in the footwell.

It also adapts your instructions for the tempera- ture to outside influences throughout the year.

The cooling is switched on automatically with the AUTO program. At the same time, a con- densation sensor controls the program in such a way that window condensation is prevented as much as possible.

Intensity of AUTO program You can adjust the intensity of the AUTO pro- gram by repeatedly pressing the AUTO button. The respective current setting is briefly dis- played on the Control Display when the button is pressed.

You can also adjust the intensity of the AUTO program via iDrive.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli- mate".

3. Select "Automatic programs" and press the controller.

4. Select the desired intensity and press the controller.

The marked intensity of the automatic program is switched on.

Convertible program* When the convertible top is opened, the con- vertible program can also be selected. In the convertible program, the automatic climate control is optimized for driving with the convert- ible top open. In addition, the air volume is increased as the speed increases.

If the convertible program has been selected, it is automatically active every time the top is opened.

The effect of the convertible program can be greatly enhanced if the wind deflector

is installed.<

Temperature Set the desired temperature indi- vidually on the driver's and front passenger side.

The automatic climate control achieves this temperature as quickly as possi- ble at any time of year, if necessary with the maximum cooling or heating capacity, and then keeps it constant.

When switching between different tem- perature settings in rapid succession, the

automatic climate control does not have suffi- cient time to achieve the set temperature.<

C lim

at e

110

In the highest setting you activate the maximum heating output, regardless of the outside tem- perature.

Adapting temperature in upper body region

1. Press the button to display the current set- ting on the Control Display.

2. Select the field by moving the controller and adjust the temperature by turning the con- troller.

You can also adjust the temperature in the upper body region with iDrive.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Open "Climate".

3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con- troller.

4. Select the field by moving the controller and adjust the temperature by turning the con- troller.

Defrosting windows and removing condensation

Quickly remove ice and condensa- tion from the windshield and front side windows.

To do this, also switch on the cooling function.

Rear window defroster The rear window defroster switches off automatically after a certain amount of time.

Convertible: the rear window defroster is only activated when the rear window is closed. Depending on the vehicle equipment, upper wires are used as an antenna and are not part of the rear window defroster.

Air volume, manual You can adjust the air volume by turning. You can reactivate the automatic mode for the air volume with the AUTO button.

The air quantity is reduced and if need be, the ventilation is switched off in order to reduce the load on the battery. The display stays the same.

Air distribution, manual You can route the air flowing out into the vehicle interior via various programs, separately for the driver's and passenger's side:

> Upper body region

> Upper body region and footwell

> Footwell

> Driver's side: windows and footwell

> Individual program

Selecting program Press the button repeatedly until the desired air distribution of the respective program is shown on the Control Display.

C o

n tr

o ls

111

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Adjusting air distribution individually individual program Your settings are stored in this program.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Open "Climate".

3. Select "Vent settings" and press the con- troller. The driver's and front passenger side can be adjusted separately with the fields on the right or left side.

4. Select the driver's or front passenger side if necessary. Move the controller to the right or left repeatedly until the driver's side or front passenger side is selected.

5. Select the desired field by moving the con- troller.

6. Turn the controller to adjust the air distribu- tion.

Driver's side:

1 Air directed toward the windshield and side windows

2 Air for the upper body

3 Air to footwell

Front passenger side:

4 Air for the upper body

5 Air to footwell

Pressing the AUTO button cancels the manual air distribution settings.<

The automatic mode for the air volume remains effective with manual air distribution.

Switching cooling function on and off The cooling function cools and dehumidifies the incoming air before reheating it as needed

according to the temperature setting. This function is only available when the engine is running.

The cooling function helps to avoid condensa- tion on the window surfaces or to quickly remove them.

Depending on the weather, the windshield may fog over briefly when the engine is started.

The cooling function is switched on automati- cally with the AUTO program.

Maximum cooling Maximally cooled air is obtained as quickly as possible at an outside temperature above approx. 327/

06 and with the engine running.

At the lowest temperature, the automatic cli- mate control switches into recirculating air mode. The maximum air volume flows out of the vents for the upper body. It is therefore neces- sary for these vents to be open for maximum cooling.

AUC Automatic recirculated-air control/recirculated-air mode

You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immedi- ate environment by temporarily

suspending the supply of outside air. The sys- tem then recirculates the air currently within the vehicle. In AUC mode, a sensor detects pollut- ants in the outside air and controls the shut-off automatically.

Press the button repeatedly to run through the following control sequence:

> LED off: outside air flows into the vehicle continuously.

> Right LED on, AUC mode: the system detects pollutants in the outside air and responds by blocking the supply of outside air when required.

C lim

at e

112

> Left LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply of outside air into the vehicle is shut off continuously.

Should the windows fog up in the recircu- lated-air mode, press the AUTO button or

switch off the recirculated-air mode and increase the air volume if necessary. The recirculated-air mode should not be used over a longer period of time, as the air quality inside the vehicle deteriorates continuously.<

Residual heat The heat stored in the engine is used to heat the passenger com- partment, e.g. while stopped at a school to pick up a child.

1. Switch off the engine.

2. Turn to the right, refer to arrow.

The function can be switched on when the fol- lowing conditions are met:

> up to 15 minutes after switching off the engine

> engine at operating temperature

> sufficient battery voltage

> at an outside temperature below 777/ 256

With the ignition lock at radio readiness or higher the interior temperature, the air volume and the air distribution can be set.

Switching automatic climate control on and off

1. Turn to the left to minimum air volume.

2. After approx. 1 second, turn to the left again.

You switch on the system again by pressing any button of the automatic climate control.

Ventilation

1 Knurled wheels for smoothly opening and closing vent outlets

2 Levers for changing the airflow direction

Do not drop any foreign objects into the vent outlets; otherwise, they could be cat-

apulted outwards and cause injuries.<

Ventilation for cooling Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool air in your direction, for instance, if the interior has become too warm, etc.

Draft-free ventilation Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past you and is not directed straight at you.

Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter provides additional protection by filtering gas- eous pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW center replaces this combined filter as a stan- dard part of your scheduled maintenance. You can have more detailed information shown on the Control Display, refer to page 77.

Parked car ventilation

The concept The parked car ventilation blows air into the passenger compartment to lower interior tem- peratures.

It is ready to use in the parked-car mode at any outside temperature.

C o

n tr

o ls

113

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

You can set two different times for the system to start. The parked car ventilation can also be switched on and off directly. It remains switched on for 30 minutes.

Since the system uses a substantial amount of electrical current, you should refrain from acti- vating it twice in succession without allowing the battery to be recharged in normal operation between uses.

The air emerges through the upper body region vent outlets in the instrument panel. Therefore, please open the vent outlets.

The parked car ventilation system is operated via iDrive.

Switching on and off directly iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli- mate".

3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the controller.

4. Select "Automatic ventilation" and press the controller.

5. Select "Parked car ventilation" and press the controller.

The parked car ventilation is switched on.

The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control flashes.

Preselecting activation times 1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the left to open "Cli- mate".

3. Select "Parked car operation" and press the controller.

4. Select "Activation time" and press the con- troller.

5. Move the controller to the left or right to select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".

6. Select the time and press the controller. The first time setting is selected.

7. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.

8. Press the controller to apply the setting. The next adjustment is selected.

9. Make the remaining adjustments. After the last adjustment, the time is stored.

C lim

at e

114

Activating timer Move the controller to the left or right to select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2" and then press the con- troller.

The switch-on time is activated.

The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control lights up.

The symbol on the display of the automatic climate control flashes when the parked car ventilation has switched on.

The parked car ventilation is only avail- able for activation within the subsequent

24 hours. Please reactivated it after this time.<

C o

n tr

o ls

115

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Practical interior accessories

Integrated universal remote control*

The concept The integrated universal remote control can replace as many as three hand-held transmit- ters for various remote-controlled accessories, such as garage and gate or lighting systems. The integrated universal remote control regis- ters and stores signals from the original hand- held transmitters.

The signal of an original hand-held transmitter can be programmed on one of the three mem- ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed memory button 1 will operate the system in question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans- mission of the signal.

If you sell your vehicle one day, delete the saved programs beforehand for your own security, refer to page 116.

To prevent possible damage or injury, before programming or using the inte-

grated universal remote control, always inspect the immediate area to make certain that no peo- ple, animals or objects are within the travel range of the device. Also, comply with the safety precautions of the original hand-held transmitter.<

Checking compatibility If you see this symbol on the packaging or in the manual supplied with the orig- inal hand-held transmitter, it is safe to

assume that it is compatible with the integrated universal remote control.

If you have additional questions, please contact your BMW center or call:

1-800-355-3515. Information is also provided on the Internet at: www.bmwusa.com or www.homelink.com. HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.<

Programming

1 Memory buttons

2 LED

Fixed-code hand-held transmitters 1. Switch on ignition, refer to page 58.

2. When using for the first time: press the left and right-hand memory button 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes quickly. All stored programs are deleted.

3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a distance of approx. 4 in/10 cm to 12 in/ 30 cm from the memory buttons 1.

The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem-

ory buttons 1 depends on the particular system of the original hand-held transmitter used.<

4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on the original hand-held transmitter and the desired memory button 1 on the integrated universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 sec- onds, alter the distance and repeat the step.

5. To program other original hand-held trans- mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

You can operate the device when the engine is running or when the ignition is switched on.

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

116

If the device fails to function even after repeated programming, check whether

the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter- nating-code system. To do so, either read the instructions for the original hand-held transmit- ter or hold down the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal remote control flashes rapidly for a short time and then remains lit for approx. 2 seconds, this indicates that the original hand-held transmitter uses an alternating-code system. In the case of an alternating-code system, program the mem- ory buttons 1 as described at Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.<

Alternating-code hand-held transmitters To program the integrated universal remote control, consult the operating instructions for the equipment to be set. You will find informa- tion there on the possibilities for synchroniza- tion. When programming hand-held transmitters that employ an alternating code, please observe the following supplementary instructions:

Programming will be easier with the aid of a second person.<

1. Park your vehicle within the range of the remote-controlled equipment.

2. Program the integrated universal remote control as described above in Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.

3. Locate the button on the receiver of the device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.

4. Press the button on the receiver of the equipment to be set. After step 4, you have approx. 30 seconds for step 5.

5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote control three times.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now programmed with the signal of the original hand-held transmitter.

If you have any additional questions, please contact your BMW center.<

Deleting all stored programs Press the left and right-hand memory button 1 for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes. All stored programs are deleted.

Programs cannot be deleted individually.

Rememorizing individual programs 1. Hold the original handheld remote control

approx. 10 to 30 cm away from the memory buttons 1.

The required distance between the hand-held transmitter and the mem-

ory buttons 1 depends on the particular system of the original hand-held transmitter used.<

2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the integrated universal remote.

3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx. 20 seconds, press the command button of the original hand-held transmitter. As soon as the LED 2 flashes rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance and repeat the step.

Glove compartment

Opening

Press the button. The glove compartment opens automatically and the lamps come on.

To prevent injury in the event of an acci- dent while the vehicle is being driven,

close the glove compartment immediately after use.<

C o

n tr

o ls

117

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Closing Raise the lid into the closed position.

Rechargeable flashlight* The flashlight is located on the left side of the glove compartment. The flashlight can remain there continuously. Remove the flashlight from the socket when needed.

Be sure that the flashlight is switched off when it is inserted into its socket. Failure

to comply with this precaution could lead to overcharging and damage.<

Center armrest

A storage compartment is located in the arm- rest between the front seats. This compartment is integrated into the central locking system and can also be locked separately using the hotel function, refer to page 33.

To open the cover: Pull the left button. The cover opens and can be folded upward.

Depending on the version, the storage com- partment can be equipped with a correspond- ing cradle* for the telephone or mobile phone.

Connection for external audio device A connection for an external audio device is located in the storage compartment. You can, for example, connect a CD player or an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehicle loud- speakers, refer to page 178

Adjusting height The center armrest can be set in two positions.

Pull the right button: Move the armrest upward or downward and lock it in the desired position.

Storage compartments

Storage compartments in the passenger compartment

Storage compartment behind center armrest

To open, raise the cover at the left or right edge. The compartment contains the cup holderand the lock for the hotel function, refer to page 33.

Other compartments and nets Other compartments are provided in the doors as well as in the front center console*.

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

118

Ticket pockets are located in the sun visors. Storage nets are located on the backrests of the front seats and in the passenger footwell*.

To prevent the risk of injury during an accident, do not stow hard or sharp-

edged items in the nets.<

Storage compartments in the luggage compartment You have the following storage options in the luggage compartment:

> Storage compartment in the right side trim panel, which is also suitable, if you so desire, for accommodating the vehicle liter- ature.

> Net at the loading lip for smaller items.

Coupe: clothes hooks

To fold down, press at the top edge.

When hanging clothing on the hooks, ensure that it will not obstruct the driver's

vision. Do not hang heavy objects on the hooks. If you do so, they could cause personal injury to occupants during braking or evasive maneu- vers.<

Cup holders Use lightweight, unbreakable containers and do not transport hot beverages. Oth-

erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the event of an accident. Do not force unsuitable containers into the cup holders, as otherwise damage can result.<

The compartment of the rear center console contains a built-in cup holder and a removable one.

The removable cup holder can be inserted into the side of the center console.

Ashtray

Opening Press the trim strip of the cover.

Emptying

Press the opened cover beyond the resistance point, refer to arrow: the ashtray lifts up for removal.

C o

n tr

o ls

119

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Cigarette lighter

Press in the lighter with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

The lighter can be removed as soon as it pops back out.

Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by the knob only. Holding or touching it in

other areas could result in burns. Always take along the remote control when you leave the vehicle; otherwise, children could, for example, use the lighter and burn themselves.<

Connecting electrical devices

Socket With the engine running or the ignition switched on, the cigarette lighter socket can be used as a power outlet for hand flashlights, car vacuum cleaners, etc., with power ratings of up to approx. 200 W at 12 V. Avoid damaging the socket by inserting plugs of different shapes or sizes.

In front passenger footwell

Access to the socket: Fold open the cover.

Ski bag* The ski bag permits safe and clean transport of up to two pairs of standard skis or one snow- board.

You can use the ski bag to stow skis up to 6.9 ft/ 2.10 m long.

Loading 1. Press the button downward and pull the

filler element forward.

2. Extend the ski bag between the front seats. The zipper gives you easy access to stowed items and facilitates drying of the ski bag.

3. Press the button in the luggage compart- ment.

4. Open the loading flap and use the magnetic holder to secure it to the rear panel.

To stow the ski bag, perform the above steps in reverse order.

Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp edges so that no damage occurs.

P ra

ct ic

al in

te ri

o r a

cc es

so ri

es

120

Securing cargo

After loading, secure the ski bag and its con- tents. To do so, tighten the retaining belt at the buckle.

Secure the ski bag in this way. If you fail to do so, it could endanger vehicle occu-

pants during braking or evasive maneuvers. To refit the filler element, insert the two tabs at the bottom into the strip and press the filler ele- ment back into place. Make sure that you do not damage the rear seat upholstery.<

C o

n tr

o ls

121

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Driving tips This section is designed to provide you

with extra support by supplying information useful in dealing with specific driving

and operating conditions.

T h

in g

s to

re m

em b

er w

h en

d ri

vi n

g

124

Things to remember when driving

Breaking-in Moving parts need time to adjust to one another. To ensure that your vehicle continues to provide optimized economy of operation throughout an extended service life, we request that you devote careful attention to the follow- ing section.

Engine and differential Always obey all official speed limits.

Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Drive at changing engine and driving speeds, however do not exceed 4,500 rpm or 100 mph/ 160 km/h.

Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the transmission's kick-down mode during these initial miles.

From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased.

Tires Due to technical factors associated with their manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac- tion potential until after an initial break-in period. Therefore, drive reservedly during the first 200 miles/300 km.

Brake system Brakes require an initial break-in period of approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized contact and wear patterns between brake pads and rotors. Drive in a reserved manner during this break-in period.

Clutch The function of the clutch is only at its opti- mized level after a distance driven of approx. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period, engage the clutch gently.

Following part replacement Observe the break-in instructions again if com- ponents mentioned above must be replaced after subsequent driving operation.

Saving fuel The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends on various factors. Through a few simple steps, your driving style, and regular maintenance, you can have a positive influence on your fuel con- sumption and environmental impact.

Removing unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption.

Removing add-on parts after use Remove unneeded auxiliary mirrors, roof or rear luggage racks after use. Add-on parts attached to the vehicle impede the aerodynamics and increase the fuel consumption.

Closing windows and the glass sunroof An open glass sunroof or open windows like- wise increase the drag coefficient and therefore the fuel consumption.

Checking tire inflation pressures regularly Check and correct the tire inflation pressure as needed at least twice a month and before long trips.

An insufficient tire inflation pressure increases the rolling resistance and thus increases the fuel consumption and tire wear.

Driving off immediately Do not allow the engine to warm up by leaving it running while the vehicle remains stationary. Instead, begin to drive at a moderate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the cold engine to reach its operating temperature.

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

125

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Thinking ahead when driving Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. To do so, maintain the appropriate distance from the vehicle in front of you. An anticipatory and smooth driving style reduces fuel con- sumption.

Avoiding high engine speeds Use 1st gear only for starting off. Accelerate rapidly in 2nd gear and above. Avoid high engine speeds in doing so and shift into the next gear early.

When you have reached the desired speed, shift into the highest possible gear and drive with the lowest possible engine speed while maintaining a constant a vehicle speed.

In general: driving at a low engine speed reduces fuel consumption and minimizes wear.

Taking advantage of coasting When approaching a red light, let off the gas and allow the vehicle to coast to a stop in the highest possible gear.

On steep roadways, let off the gas and allow the vehicle to roll in the appropriate gear.

The flow of fuel is interrupted when coasting.

Switching off engine during longer stops Switch off the engine at longer stops such as traffic signals, railroad crossings, or in traffic jams. Even having the engine switched off for approx. 4 seconds results in fuel savings.

Switching off functions currently not required Functions such as air conditioning, seat heat- ing, or rear window defrosting consume a lot of energy and require additional fuel. Their influ- ence is particularly pronounced in city traffic and stop & go operation. For this reason, it is a good idea to switch these functions off when they are not really needed.

Having maintenance done Have the vehicle serviced regularly in order to achieve the optimum economy and service life of your vehicle. BMW recommends having the maintenance performed by a BMW center. Also please pay attention to the BMW maintenance system, refer to page 221.

General driving notes

Closing luggage compartment lid Only drive with the luggage compartment lid completely closed, otherwise exhaust

can penetrate into the passenger compart- ment.<

If it is absolutely necessary to drive with the lug- gage compartment lid open:

1. Coupe: close both windows and the glass sunroof. Convertible: with closed top, close all win- dows.

2. Increase the air volume of the automatic cli- mate control to a high level, refer to page 110.

Hot exhaust system As in all vehicles, extremely high temper- atures are generated in the exhaust sys-

tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed adjacent to it, and never apply undercoating to them. When driving, standing at idle and while parking, take care to avoid possible contact between the hot exhaust system and any highly flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass, etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, and with it the risk of serious property damage as well as personal injury. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes. Otherwise there is a risk of burns.<

Hydroplaning When driving on wet or slushy roads, reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge

of water can form between tires and road sur- face. This phenomenon is referred to as hydro- planing, and is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and

T h

in g

s to

re m

em b

er w

h en

d ri

vi n

g

126

the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle.<

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the tread depth of the tires decreases, also refer to Mini- mum tire tread on page 213.

Driving through water Do not drive through water on the road if it is deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only at

walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the vehi- cle's engine, the electrical systems and the transmission may be damaged.<

Using handbrake on inclines On inclines, do not hold the vehicle in place for a long time by riding the clutch;

use the handbrake. Otherwise, greater clutch wear will result.<

Braking safely Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard feature. In situations that require it, it is best to brake with full force. Since the vehicle maintains steering responsiveness, you can still avoid possible obstacles with a minimum of steering effort.

Pulsation at the brake pedal combines with sounds from the hydraulic circuits to indicate to the driver that ABS is in its active mode.

Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light but consistent

pedal pressure can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<

Driving in wet conditions When driving on wet roads or in heavy rain, it is a good idea to apply light pressure to the brake pedal every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to ensure that this maneuver does not endan- ger other road users. The heat generated in this process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure that full braking efficiency will then be available when you need it.

Hills To prevent overheating and thus reduced efficiency of the brake system, downshift

to a gear in which only minimal brake applica- tions are needed when descending long or steep downhill stretches. Even light but consis- tent pressure on the brake pedal can lead to high temperatures, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.<

The braking effect of the engine can be further increased by downshifting, if necessary all the way down into first gear. This strategy helps you avoid placing excessive loads on the brake system. For information on downshifting in the manual mode of the sport automatic transmis- sion, refer to page 61.

Do not drive with the clutch depressed, in idle or with the engine switched off, other-

wise there will be no engine braking action or support of the braking force and steering. Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other objects to protrude into the area of movement of the pedals and impair their operation.<

Corrosion on brake rotors When the vehicle is driven only occasionally, during extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all, and in operating conditions where brake applications are less frequent, there is an increased tendency for corrosion to form on rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the brake pads. This occurs because the minimum pressure which must be exerted by the pads during brake applications to clean the rotors is not reached.

Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating effect that even extended application will fail to cure.

When vehicle is parked Condensation forms in the automatic climate control during operation, and then exits under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water under the vehicle are therefore normal.

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

127

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Before driving into a car wash To prevent the exterior mirrors on this vehicle from being damaged, always fold them in by hand before entering an automatic car wash.

General information on the care and mainte- nance of your BMW is contained in the Caring for your vehicle brochure.

Sport automatic transmission Insert the remote control into the ignition lock. The engine can be switched off with the trans- mission in neutral. Also refer to page 38.

Cargo loading To avoid loading the tires beyond their approved carrying capacity, never over-

load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over- heating and increases the rate at which damage develops inside the tires. The ultimate result can assume the form of a sudden blow-out.<

Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo bay; otherwise the vehicle could be dam-

aged.<

Determining loading limit

1. Locate the following statement on your vehicle's placard*:

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed

XXX lbs. or YYY kg, as otherwise the vehicle may be damaged and unstable driving con- ditions may result.<

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs. or YYY kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 800 lbs. and there will be four 150-lb. pas- sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail- able cargo and luggage load capacity is 200 lbs.: 800 lbs. minus 600 lbs. = 200 lbs.

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult the manual for transporting a trailer to determine how this may reduce the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Load

The permissible load is the total of the weight of occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the weight of occupants, the less cargo/luggage can be transported.

T h

in g

s to

re m

em b

er w

h en

d ri

vi n

g

128

Stowing cargo

> Place heavy cargo as far forward and as low as possible, placing it directly behind the bulkhead behind the rear seats.

> Cover sharp edges and corners.

Securing cargo

> Use the luggage net* or securing straps to hold down small and lightweight luggage and cargo.

> Heavy-duty cargo straps* for securing larger and heavier objects are available at your BMW center. Four lashing eyes mounted in the luggage compartment are used to secure these heavy-duty cargo straps, refer to arrows.

> Please observe the special instructions supplied with the heavy-duty cargo straps.

Position and secure the cargo as described above, so that it cannot endan-

ger the vehicle's occupants, for example if sud- den braking or evasive maneuvers are neces- sary. When fastening lashings, use only the lashing eyes, refer to illustration; otherwise, the lash- ings could come loose or you could damage the vehicle. Never exceed the approved gross vehicle

weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer to page 237, as excessive loads can pose a safety hazard, and may also put you in violation of freeway safety laws. You should never transport unsecured heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment, as they could fly around and pose a safety hazard to the vehicle's occupants during abrupt brak- ing or evasive maneuvers.<

Pad on base of luggage compartment You can use the pad as needed, for example to transport soiled objects. The rubberized side is washable and has an anti-skid effect.

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

129

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Navigation This chapter describes how you can

enter destinations and specify your route so that your navigation system guides you

reliably to your destination.

S ta

rt in

g n

av ig

at io

n sy

st em

132

Starting navigation system

Your navigation system can use satellites to ascertain the precise position of your vehicle and guide you reliably to any destination you enter.

Navigation DVD The navigation system requires a special navi- gation DVD. The latest version is available at your BMW center.

Inserting navigation DVD

1. Insert the navigation DVD with the labeled side up. The navigation DVD is pulled in automatically.

2. Wait several seconds for the system to scan the data from the DVD.

Removing navigation DVD 1. Press button 1.

The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.

2. Remove the DVD.

If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, it is pos- sible that it is blocked. In this case a message is also shown on the Control Display.

Display in the assistance window You can display the route or the current position in the assistance window. This display remains visible even if you change to another applica- tion.

1. Move the controller to the right to enter the assistance window.

2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select the desired route view or "Current position".

4. Press the controller.

Displaying arrow view in map view* If the navigation system suggests a change of direction, the arrow view is briefly displayed.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

*

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

133

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units" is selected and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Arrow display pop-up instructions" and press the controller.

The arrow view appears in the assistance window.

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

134

Destination entry

In entering your destination you can select from among the following options:

> Entering a destination manually, see below

> Entering destination via voice*, refer to page 137

> Selecting destination using information, refer to page 140

> Selecting destination from a list, refer to Destination list, page 141

> Selecting destination from address book, refer to page 142

> Selecting home address, refer to page 144

After selecting your destination you can pro- ceed to start the destination guidance, refer to page 146.

You can also store a navigation destination on the programmable memory/direct selection buttons, refer to page 21.

Enter data only when the vehicle is sta- tionary, and always give priority to the

applicable traffic regulations in the event of any contradiction between traffic and road condi- tions and the instructions issued by the naviga- tion system. If you do not observe this precau- tion, you can endanger the vehicle occupants and other road users.<

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the right to call up "Navigation".

3. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.

The Control Display shows:

> the arrow view or map view during destina- tion guidance

> the destination list when destination guid- ance is switched off

Entering a destination manually The system's word-matching principle makes it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns, refer to page 145. This allows you to enter different spellings and completes your entry automatically so that stored names can be called up quickly.

1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Navigation" is selected and press the controller. "New destination" is selected.

2. Press the controller.

3. Select "Enter address" and press the con- troller.

The system also supports you with the follow- ing features:

> If you do not enter a street, the system will guide you to the downtown area of a town or city.

> You can skip the entry of country and town/ city if the current entries are being retained for your new destination.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

135

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Selecting country 1. Select "State / Province" or the displayed

country and press the controller.

The list of available countries appears on the display.

2. Select the country of destination and press the controller.

In order to be able to start the destination guid- ance, at least the town/city of the destination or its zip code must be entered.

Entering destination via town/city name 1. Select "Town / City" or the displayed town/

city and press the controller.

2. Select the first letter and press the control- ler. A list of all towns/cities starting with this let- ter appears on the Control Display.

3. To delete the letter entered if necessary:

> Delete individual numbers or letters: Move the controller toward the right to select and press the controller.

> Delete all digits or letters: Move the controller toward the right to select and press the controller longer.

4. Enter additional letters if necessary. The list gradually grows smaller each time you enter a new letter.

> Enter a blank space if necessary: Select the symbol and press the con- troller.

5. Change to the third field from the top if nec- essary. Turn the controller until the town/ city name is selected from the list and press the controller.

Entering town/city of destination via zip code 1. Select "Town / City" and press the control-

ler.

2. Enter the zip code: Select the individual digits and press the controller.

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

136

> Enter a blank space: Select the symbol and press the con- troller.

> Delete individual digits or letters: Move the controller toward the right to select and press the controller.

> Delete all digits or letters: Move the controller toward the right to select and press the controller longer.

3. Select the zip code and press the controller. The corresponding town/city of destination is displayed.

4. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until the town/city of destination is selected and press the con- troller.

Entering street, house number and intersection After the street you can also enter the intersec- tion or the house number.

Entering street and intersection 1. Select "Street" or the displayed street and

press the controller.

2. Enter the street. The street is entered in exactly the same way as the town/city of destination.

The intersection is entered in the same way as the street.

Entering a street without entering town/city of destination You can also enter a street without entering a destination. In this case all streets of the entered country are offered for selection. The related town/city is displayed after the street name.

If a town/city has already been entered, you can undo this entry. This may be practical if the desired street does not exist in the entered town/city of destination, because, for example, it belongs to another part of the town/city.

1. Change to upper field. The arrow is selected.

2. Turn the controller to the right until the request for the entry of a street in the coun- try appears and press the controller.

3. Change to the second field from the top and enter the street.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

137

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Entering house number All house numbers stored for the street on the navigation DVD can be entered.

1. Select "House number" and press the con- troller.

2. Enter the house number: Select the individual digits and press the controller.

3. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until the house number is selected and press the controller.

Starting destination guidance with manual destination entry

> Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller. Destination guidance starts immediately.

> If destination guidance is not to be started immediately: Select "Add to destination list" and press the controller. The destination is stored in the destination list, refer to page 141.

Entering destination via voice* You can enter a desired destination via the voice command system. When entering the destination, it is possible to change between voice command and iDrive at any time. Reacti- vate the voice command function for this pur- pose if necessary.

With {Options} you can have the possible commands read aloud.<

1. Press the button on the steering wheel.

Selecting country 1. Wait for the system to ask for the country of

destination.

Say the name of the country of destination in the language of the voice command system.

Entering town/city of destination The town/city of destination can be spelled or entered as an entire word.

Spelling town/city of destination To enter the town/city of destination, spell it using the customary spelling of the country of destination. Pronounce the letters smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses.

The system can suggest up to 20 towns/cit- ies of destination that match your entries. Up to 6 entries are displayed at once on the Control Display.

2. {Enter address}

2. Say the name of the country of destina- tion.

1. Spell town/city name: Say at least the first three letters of the town/city of destination. The more let- ters you say, the more exactly the sys- tem recognizes the town/city.

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

138

The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: Turn the controller until the town/city of desti- nation is selected and press the controller.

Entering the destination as an entire word* Towns/cities of destination and streets located in the region where the language of the voice command system is spoken can be entered as an entire word.

Example: to enter a US town/city of destination as an entire word, the system language must be English.

Speak smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses.

1. Wait for the system to request the town/city of destination.

The system can suggest up to 6 towns/cit- ies of destination that match your entries.

The town/city can also be selected from the list via iDrive: Turn the controller until the town/city of desti- nation is selected and press the controller.

Destinations that sound the same which cannot be differentiated by the system

are summarized in a separate list and shown as a destination followed by three dots. Select this entry with {Yes} if necessary. Then select the desired city/town in this list.<

Entering street and house number The street is entered in the same way as the town/city of destination.

To enter the house number:

Up to 4-digit house numbers can be entered. Say the house number as individual digits.

Starting destination guidance

Destination guidance starts immediately.

A destination is suggested by the system.

2. Select a town/city:

> Select highlighted town/city: {Yes}

> Select other town/city: {No}

> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}

> Display additional entries of the list: {Next page}

> To respell the town/city: {Repeat}

2. Say the name of the town/city of desti- nation.

A destination is suggested by the system.

3. Select a town/city:

> Select highlighted town/city: {Yes}

> Select other town/city: {No}

> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 3}

> Reenter the town/city: {Repeat}

> Enter town/city of destination by spelling it: {Spell}

1. {House number}

2. Say the house number.

{Start guidance}

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

139

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Saving destination The destination is added to the destination list or can be stored in the address book.

Map-guided destination selection If you only know the location of the town/city or street of the destination, then you can input the destination by using a map. You can use the cursor to select the destination on the map and then adopt it into the destination guidance.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler. "New destination" is selected.

2. Press the controller.

3. Select "Input map" and press the controller.

A section of a map is displayed on the Con- trol Display:

> During destination guidance, around the current destination

> With the destination guidance deacti- vated, around the last destination entered

4. Select a destination with the cursor.

> Changing scale: turn the controller.

> Moving map: move the controller in the corresponding direction. The controller can be moved to the left, right, forward and back.

5. Press the controller to accept or store the destination in the destination guidance sys- tem. The selected town/city of destination and other menu items are displayed.

6. Select the desired menu item:

> "Start route guidance" starts destination guidance.

> "Show current position" places the cur- rent position in the center of the map.

> "Show destination position" places the current destination in the center of the map.

> "Return to map" changes back to the "Input map".

> Exit the menu.

7. Press the controller.

{Add to destination list} or {Add to address book}

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

140

The map for destination input can also be called up from the map view: Select the symbol and press the controller.

Selecting destination using information You can obtain a display of selected destina- tions, e.g. hotels, sights or hospitals, and adopt them into the destination guidance.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.

2. Select "Information" and press the control- ler.

3. Select location:

> "On destination"

> "On location"

> "On a new destination"

4. Press the controller.

5. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels and res- taurants", and press the controller.

6. Enter search criteria if necessary, e.g. the maximum distance from the current loca- tion.

7. Select " " and press the con- troller. These destinations are displayed on the Control Display.

8. Select a destination and press the control- ler.

The scope of the information and symbols is dependent on the respec-

tive navigation DVD.<

9. Select the desired menu item:

> To transfer the address to the destina- tion list and start destination guidance: Select the symbol and press the controller.

> To establish a telephone connection: Select the symbol and press the con- troller.

> To display additional destinations: Select the symbol and press the controller.

> To start a new search: Select the symbol and press the con- troller.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

141

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Symbols in map view If, for example, you have selected the category Hotels, the hotels are shown on the map as symbols.

To hide the symbols in the map view:

1. Select the symbol and press the controller.

2. Select "Hide map icons" and press the con- troller.

The symbols are hidden.

To display the symbols: Select "Show map icons" and press the con- troller.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Destination list The last 20 destinations entered into the desti- nation list are displayed. You can select these destinations and adopt them into the destina- tion guidance system. For example, in order to plan a longer route, you can store all of the destinations you wish to visit in the destination list ahead of time, refer to Entering a destination manually on page 134.

Select "Navigation" and press the controller.

The last destination entered is the first item in the destination list.

This symbol indicates the current destina- tion during destination guide.

To display other destinations in the destination list: Turn the controller.

Adopting the destination into the destination guidance system 1. Select the desired destination from the des-

tination list and press the controller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.

Editing destination list 1. Select the desired destination from the des-

tination list and press the controller.

2. The selected destination can be edited:

> Saving entry: Select "Add to address book".

> Displaying information on destination: Select "Information on destination".

> Deleting entry: Select "Delete entry".

> Deleting all entries: Select "Delete list". Destination guid- ance is switched off.

> Changing entry: Select "Edit". For operation, refer to Entering destination via town/city name, page 135.

3. Press the controller.

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

142

Address book

Opening address book iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

Select "Address book" and press the controller.

Storing destinations in address book You can store approx. 100 destinations in the address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con- troller.

2. Select "New address" and press the con- troller.

3. Select "Enter address" and press the con- troller.

4. Enter name and address, also refer to Entering a destination manually, page 134.

5. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller. The entry is stored in the address book.

You can also store a destination from the desti- nation list in the address book, refer to page 141.

Storing current position* The current position can be adopted into the address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con- troller.

2. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "New address" is selected and press the controller.

3. Select "Use current location as address" and press the controller. The name given can be changed. For oper- ation, refer to Entering a destination manu- ally, page 134.

4. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.

You can also enter your current position in the address book if you have left the sector covered by the navigation DVD. In this case, you must enter a name.

Selecting destinations from address book 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller. The stored entries are displayed on the Control Display.

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

143

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

To start destination guidance: Select "Start guidance" and press the control- ler.

Changing destinations from address book 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

3. Select "Edit address" and press the con- troller.

4. Change entry. For operation, refer to Entering a destina- tion manually, page 134.

5. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.

Deleting individual destinations from address book 1. Select "Address book" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the entry and press the controller.

3. Select "Delete address" and press the con- troller.

4. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Deleting all destinations from address book 1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Vehicle / Tires" and press the con- troller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Delete data" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Delete address book" and press the controller.

7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.

D es

ti n

at io

n e

n tr

y

144

Storing home address You can store your current position or the cur- rent destination as a home address in the address book. This entry is in the second posi- tion in the address book.

1. Select "Address book" and press the con- troller.

2. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Home address" is selected and press the controller.

3. Select "Use current location as address", or "Save current destination" during the desti- nation guidance, and press the controller.

4. Select "Store in address book" and press the controller.

Adopting home address as destination 1. Select "Home address" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.

Changing home address 1. Select "Home address" and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Edit address" and press the con- troller. For operation, refer to Entering a destination manually, page 134.

Selecting route You can influence the calculated route by choosing certain route criteria. You can change the route criteria as often as you like when entering the destination and whenever the des- tination guidance is active.

The route is planned according to fixed rules, taking the road type into account, e.g. whether it involves freeways or winding roads. The road types are stored on the navigation DVD. As a result, the routes recommended by the naviga- tion system may not always be the same ones that you would choose based on personal expe- rience.

Changing route criteria 1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Route preference" is selected and press the controller.

The various criteria are listed on the Control Display.

3. Select a route criterion for the route:

> "With highways" Freeways and major traffic arteries are given priority.

> "Avoid highways" Freeways are avoided where possible.

> "Fast route" The short traveling time, being a combi- nation of the shortest possible route and the fastest roads

> "Short route" Short route, regardless of how fast or slow progress will be

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

145

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

4. Press the controller.

The route criterion is selected.

5. If necessary, select an additional route cri- terion and then press the controller:

> "Dynamic route"* Automatic changing of the route in case of traffic obstructions. Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction, the route can also be calculated in a way that passes through the traffic obstruction.

> "Avoid tollroads" Tollroads are avoided where possible.

> "Avoid ferries" Ferries are avoided where possible.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

The route criteria can also be changed in the arrow or map view:

1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and press the controller.

2. Select a route criterion and press the con- troller.

If the route criteria "Avoid highways", "Avoid tollroads" or "Avoid ferries" are

selected, the calculation time for the route can increase considerably.<

Word matching principle The system supports the word matching princi- ple to make it easier for you to enter the names of streets or towns/cities. The system runs ongoing checks, comparing your destination entries with the data stored on the navigation DVD as the basis for instant response. The user benefits include:

> Names of specific towns/cities can also vary from the official versions, provided that the spelling of the entry corresponds to a stan- dard form used in another country.

Example:

Instead of "Munich", you can also enter the German spelling "Mnchen" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".

> When you are entering the names of towns/ cities and streets, the system will complete them automatically as soon as enough let- ters are available to ensure unambiguous identification.

> The system only accepts name entries beginning with letters that are stored on the navigation DVD. The system will not accept nonexistent names and addresses.

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

146

Destination guidance

Starting destination guidance 1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "Navigation" is selected and press the controller.

2. Select a destination from the destination list and press the controller or enter a new des- tination, refer to page 134.

3. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- troller.

After the route has been calculated, destination guidance is indicated by arrows or a map dis- play on the Control Display.

The destination guidance can also be started in the arrow or map view: Select the symbol and press the controller.

During destination guidance, you can operate other equipment via iDrive at any time. You are notified well in advance of a necessary change of direction by spoken instructions and the dis- play of the direction arrows.

With programmable memory/ direct selection buttons Press the ... button on which the desired destination is stored. Also refer to page 22.

Destination guidance, terminating/continuing

In arrow display or map view Select the symbol and press the controller.

In destination list This symbol marks the current destination.

1. Select the current destination and press the controller.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

147

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

2. Select "Stop guidance" and press the con- troller.

If the destination was not reached before the end of the last trip, upon restarting you will see the question: "Continue guidance to destination?".

The destination guidance starts automatically after a short time.

To start destination guidance immediately: Select "Yes" and press the controller.

Displaying route You have the option of displaying various views of the route during destination guidance.

From another menu, you can change directly to the screen last displayed,

refer to Comfort opening of menu items, page 18.<

Displaying arrow display 1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until "Arrow display" is selected and press the controller.

The arrow display is displayed.

1 Switching voice instructions on/off

2 Manually displaying traffic information* 3 Selecting route criteria

4 Starting/stopping destination guidance

5 Arrow to destination as the crow flies

6 Distance to the next change of direction

7 Current position

8 Direction of travel

> Hollow arrow: Destination guidance on the calculated route.

> Solid arrow: Arrow shows the route to be calculated from a bird's eye view when the vehicle is not located in an area contained on the navigation DVD, e.g. in a parking struc- ture.

Depending on the equipment, the estimated time of arrival and the distance to the destina- tion are displayed in the top or bottom line of the Control Display.

Before a change of direction, the appearance of the arrow changes.

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

148

1 Street name for change of direction

2 Distance to change of direction

3 Change of direction

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Displaying map view You can have your current position displayed on a map. After starting the destination guidance, the planned route is shown on the map.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.

2. Change into the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until the desired map view is selected:

> "Map facing north"

> "Map direction of travel"

> "Perspective"

3. Press the controller.

1 Switching voice instructions on/off

2 Starting/stopping destination guidance

3 Selecting destination using map

4 Displaying the menu in which the informa- tion last selected can be displayed/hidden, refer to Selecting destination via informa- tion on page 140

5 Changing map view

> "Map facing north"

> "Map direction of travel"

> "Perspective"

6 Changing route criteria

7 Manually displaying traffic information* 8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies

The estimated time of arrival and the distance to the destination are shown in the bottom line of the Control Display.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

At scales of less than 250 miles/500 km, you have the option of deciding whether to orient the map to north or toward your current direc- tion of travel. At scales of 250 miles/500 km or greater, the map always points toward north.

Changing map view

Select the corresponding symbol and press the controller. The next map view is displayed.

Changing scale Turn the controller to change the scale.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

149

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Displaying streets and towns/cities of route You can have the roads and towns along the route displayed during destination guidance.

The distances remaining to be traveled on each individual road are also displayed.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.

2. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "Route list" is selected and press the controller.

To exit the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Destination guidance via voice instructions

Switching voice instructions on/off

During destination guidance, voice instructions can be switched on or off in the arrow or map view: Select the symbol and press the controller.

To switch the voice instructions on/off at any time:

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units" is selected and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Languages" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Navigation voice instructions" and press the controller.

The voice instructions are switched on.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use*.

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

150

Repeating and canceling voice instructions With the programmable buttons on the steering wheel you can also make the following settings, refer to page 55:

> Repeat the voice instruction: Press the button.

> Switch voice instructions on/off: Press button longer.

Setting volume of voice instructions The volume can only be adjusted during a voice instruction.

1. Repeat the last voice instruction, if required.

2. Turn the knob during the voice instruction to select the desired volume.

This volume is independent of the volume of the audio sources.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Bypassing route sections During destination guidance, you can revise the navigation system's route recommendations to avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the number of miles/kilometers that you want to travel before returning to the original route.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.

2. Change into the third field from the top. Turn the controller until "New route" is selected and press the controller.

3. Turn the controller to enter the desired number and press the controller.

The route is recalculated.

To exit from the menu without changing the route:

Select the arrow and press the controller.

Traffic information* In many congested areas, you can receive traf- fic information transmitted by radio stations. The traffic conditions are monitored by traffic management centers and the traffic information is periodically updated. During destination guidance, the traffic infor- mation relevant to your planned route is auto- matically displayed. Whether destination guid- ance is active or not, you can have the traffic information displayed in the map view or in the traffic info list.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

151

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Switching reception of traffic information on/off 1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "Traffic Info set- tings" is selected and press the controller.

5. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control- ler.

The traffic information can be received and displayed.

"AUTO": automatic selection of the Traffic Info station with the strongest reception.

Depending on the station, either the sta- tion name, frequency, local number or

other information is displayed.<

Manually displaying traffic information

During destination guidance During destination guidance, traffic information can be displayed in the arrow or map view.

If the symbol is shown with a red border, traf- fic information is available for the planned route.

Select the symbol and press the controller.

During destination guidance, the traffic infor- mation on the planned route is marked with a yellow diamond.

First the traffic information along the planned route is shown sorted according to the distance to the current vehicle position.

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

152

With destination guidance switched off 1. Open the start menu.

2. Move the controller to the right to call up "Navigation".

3. Select "Traffic Info" and press the control- ler.

First the traffic information along the planned route is shown sorted according to the distance to the current vehicle position.

Depiction of traffic information in map view The traffic information symbols are shown in the map view up to a scale of 100 miles/200 km.

The section of the route affected by a traffic report as well as the number for the type of inci- dent are displayed and hidden. This occurs as a function of the scale selected.

Displaying detailed traffic information Select a traffic information item from the list and press the controller.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

Symbols for traffic information

Traffic event with map scales greater than 5 miles/10 km, arrow points in the direction of travel concerned

Several traffic events have been received. Select a smaller scale to display these individually.

Traffic light failure

Roadwork

General traffic obstruction Transport of hazardous load Vehicle on wrong carriage way

Danger

Low clearance

No parking

Fog

Heavy rain

Slippery road

Cross winds

Smog

Road close

Slow traffic

Traffic back up

Stopped traffic

Icy roads

Uneven surface

Accident

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

153

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Traffic information during destination guidance System response will vary depending on whether or not "Dynamic route" is selected.

Displaying traffic obstructions If a traffic obstruction is reported to the naviga- tion system and "Dynamic route" is not selected, you will be provided with certain infor- mation from a distance of approx. 25 miles/ 40 km, e.g. the length of the traffic congestion. The last possible junction will be displayed shortly before this.

This information is also displayed if you have called up a different application on the Control Display.

Dynamic route planning When "Dynamic route" is selected, the route will be changed automatically in the event of a traffic obstruction. The system does not point out traffic obstructions along the original route. Depending on road type and the kind and extent of the traffic obstruction, the calculated route may lead through the traffic obstruction.

Displaying current position You can also display your current position with the destination guidance switched off.

1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- ler.

2. Change into the fourth field from the top. Turn the controller until "Current position" is selected and press the controller.

Lane closure

Delay

Police checkpoint

Slow traffic or other event

Stop-and-go traffic

Stopped traffic

Traffic event in both directions of travel

D es

ti n

at io

n g

u id

an ce

154

The current position of your BMW is displayed.

If the navigation system is unable to identify a town or city, your current map coordinates will appear.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

You can also have the current position dis- played on a map, refer to page 148.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

155

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

What to do if

What to do if

> a navigation DVD is inserted, but the request to insert the DVD is displayed on the Control Display? The navigation DVD may not be the right DVD for the navigation system. The DVD is labeled accordingly.

> you request the current position of your vehicle, but do not receive a precise dis- play? The system is unable to receive enough GPS signals at your current position due to obstructions, your position is not yet avail- able on your navigation DVD, or the system is in the process of calculating your posi- tion. As a rule, reception is guaranteed in the open air.

> the destination guidance does not accept a destination? The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.

> the destination guidance does not accept a destination without the street name? On the navigation DVD, no downtown area can be determined for the city or town entered. Enter any street, or a destination such as the railway station etc., then start the destination guidance.

> you want to enter a destination for the des- tination guidance, but it is not possible to select the letters for your desired entry? The data of the destination is not stored on the navigation DVD that is loaded. In this case, the system will not offer you any let- ters to choose from. Select a destination that is as close as possible to the original.

> the system stops furnishing directions on which way to turn as you approach intersec- tions? You are driving in an area that has not yet been completely recorded on the naviga- tion DVD. Instead of an arrow indicating a turn, you will see an arrow which indicates the general direction of your planned route. Or you have left the recommended route and the system requires a few seconds to calculate a new recommended route.

> the navigation system does not react to entries? If the battery was disconnected, it takes about 10 minutes before the system is once again operational.

Entertainment This chapter describes the operation of the radio and CD player as well as

their tone settings.

O n

/o ff

a n

d to

n e

158

On/off and tone

The following audio sources have shared controls and setting options:

> Professional* radio or Business radio

> CD player

> CD changer*

Controls The audio sources can be operated using:

> Buttons in the area of the CD player

> iDrive

> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11

> Programmable memory/direct selection buttons, refer to page 21

Buttons near CD player The layout of the buttons can vary depending on your vehicle's equipment.

One drive:

Two drives:

1 Entertainment sound output on/off, volume

> Press: switch on/off. When the system is switched on, the most recently selected radio station or CD track is played.

> Turn: adjust volume.

2 Drive for audio CDs

3 Eject CD

4 Station scan/track search

> Change radio station.

> Select track for CD player and CD changer.

5 Drive for navigation DVDs

Operating via iDrive 1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".

You have the following choices:

> "FM" and "AM": radio reception

> "WB": Weather Band station

> "SAT": satellite radio

> "CD": CD player or CD changer

> "AUX": AUX-In connection

> USB/audio interface* > "Set": depending on the audio source,

other adjustments can be made, e.g. with the radio: update station with strongest reception, store station, tone control, sample stations.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

159

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

From another menu, you can change directly to the screen last displayed,

refer to Comfort opening of menu items, page 18.<

With the ignition key in radio-ready position or higher, the selected audio source is stored for the remote control currently in use.

Switching on/off To switch the Entertainment sound output on/off: Press knob 1 next to the CD player.

This symbol on the Control Display indi- cates that sound output is switched off.

For a single drive, the sound output is available for approx. 20 minutes with the ignition switched off. To do so, switch the sound output on again.

Adjusting volume Turn knob 1 next to the CD player until the desired volume is set.

You can also adjust the volume with the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

From radio readiness, the setting for the remote control used at the moment is saved.

Tone control You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble and bass, or the speed-dependent volume increase. The sound settings are globally adjusted for all audio sources.

From radio readiness, the settings are saved for the remote control used at the moment.

Changing tone settings 1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.

The tone settings can also be selected when you have opened "Entertainment" in the start menu: Select "Set" and then "Tone", and press the controller.

Treble and bass 1. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the

controller until "Treble / Bass" is selected and press the controller.

2. Move the controller to the left or right to select "Treble" or "Bass".

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.

O n

/o ff

a n

d to

n e

160

Balance and fader You can adjust the volume distribution in the same manner as "Treble / Bass".

> "Balance": left/right volume distribution

> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution

Speed-dependent volume control The speed-dependent volume control auto- matically increases the volume with increasing speed. You can set various stages for the increase in volume.

1. Select "Speed volume" and press the con- troller.

2. Turn the controller: The adjustment is applied; the field can be changed.

Individual high-end sound system* You can choose between Stereo and Surround.

1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the controller.

2. Select "Stereo" or "Surround".

3. Press the controller. The spatial sound effect is activated.

Professional LOGIC7 HiFi System* You can select a spatial sound effect that improves the spatial acoustics in all frequency ranges.

1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the controller.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

161

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

2. Select "Concert hall" or "Theater".

3. Press the controller. LOGIC7 spatial sound is switched on.

To switch off spatial sound: Select "Off" and press the controller.

LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the Harman International Group.

Equalizer* You can set individual sound frequency ranges:

1. Select "Equalizer" and press the controller.

2. Move the controller to the left or right to select the desired frequency range.

3. Turn the controller until the desired setting is selected.

Resetting tone settings You can reset all tone settings to the default settings.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Reset" is selected and press the controller.

With two drives: select "Yes".

R ad

io

162

Radio

Your radio provides reception of the FM and AM wavebands.

Listening to radio

Press the button if the sound output is switched off.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to call up "Entertainment".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "FM" or "AM" is selected.

4. Press the controller.

Stations are shown on the Control Display on the basis of various selection criteria, e.g. "Pre- sets".

If "Autostore" does not display any stations or if the stations displayed can no longer be received, to update the station with the stron- gest signal, refer to page 164.

Changing stations

Turn the controller.

In addition to the stations currently displayed, you can have stations with another selection criterion displayed.

Professional* radio You can choose from the following selection criteria:

> "All stations": Stations that can currently be received in the "FM" waveband.

> "Autostore": The stations with the strongest received signals in the "AM" waveband.

> "Presets": Stations you have stored, refer to page 164.

> "Manual": To set stations that can be received in addi- tion to those displayed, refer to Selecting frequency manually on page 163.

Business radio You can choose from the following selection criteria:

> "Autostore": The stations with the strongest signal, refer to page 164.

> "Presets": Stations you have stored, refer to page 164.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

163

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

> "Manual": To set stations that can be received in addi- tion to those displayed, refer to Selecting frequency manually.

Changing selection criteria In addition to the stations currently displayed, you can have stations with another selection criterion displayed.

You can choose from the following selection criteria:

> "All stations": Stations that can currently be received in the "FM" waveband.

> "Autostore": The stations with the strongest received signals in the "AM" waveband.

> "Presets": Stations you have previously stored, refer to page 164.

> "Manual": To set stations that can be received in addi- tion to those displayed, refer to Selecting frequency manually.

1. Change into the second field from the top.

2. Turn the controller until the desired selec- tion criterion is selected and press the con- troller.

Buttons next to CD player Press the button for the corresponding direction. The system changes to the next displayed sta- tion. You can also change stations with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Sampling stations, scan The system automatically plays a brief sample from each of the stations on the current wave- band.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler. "Set" is selected.

2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

The stations are sampled.

To end sampling:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

This cancels sampling of the stations, and the radio remains on the current station.

Buttons next to CD player To sample the stations, press and hold the

button for the corresponding direction.

To stop scanning, press the button again.

Selecting frequency manually With "Manual" you can select stations that are received in addition to those displayed.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler.

2. Change into the second field from the top.

3. Select "Manual" and press the controller.

R ad

io

164

4. Turn the controller to set a certain fre- quency.

Updating stations with best reception Radio Professional on "AM" and Radio Busi- ness: If you are on a longer journey and leave the transmission range of the stations originally set, you can update the list of stations with the best reception signal.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler.

2. Change into the second field from the top.

3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller. "Set" is selected.

4. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

The display of the stations with the best recep- tion is updated. The frequencies of the stations are displayed.

Storing stations 1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-

ler.

2. Change into the second field from the top. Turn the controller until the desired selec- tion criterion is selected and press the con- troller.

3. Select the desired frequency or station. "Set" is selected.

4. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

5. Select "Store" and press the controller.

"Presets" is displayed.

6. Turn the controller until the desired mem- ory position is selected.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

165

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

7. Press the controller. The station is stored.

The stations of the last selection criterion are displayed once again after a short time.

From radio readiness, the stations are saved for the remote control used at the moment.

With programmable memory/ direct selection buttons You can also store a station on the programma- ble memory/direct selection buttons, also refer to page 21.

1. Select a station.

2. ... Press and hold desired but- ton.

Changing a memory position 1. Select "Presets" and press the controller.

2. Select the desired station. "Set" is selected.

3. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

4. Select "Store" and press the controller.

5. Turn the controller until the desired mem- ory position is selected. The number of the memory position appears beside the name or frequency of the station.

6. Press the controller. The station is stored.

RDS Radio Data System In the FM frequency range, additional informa- tion is transmitted via RDS. If the reception con- ditions are good, the station names are shown on the Control Display. If the reception is weak or disrupted, it can take some time before the station names are displayed.

Switching RDS on/off* 1. Select "FM" and press the controller.

"Set" is selected.

2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.

RDS is activated.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Automatically sorting stations* For the "All stations" selection criterion, you can set whether the most frequently used sta- tions are displayed at the beginning.

1. Select "All stations" and press the control- ler. "Set" is selected.

R ad

io

166

2. Select "Favorites" and press the controller.

The most frequently used stations are shown at the beginning.

Weather news flashes* Weather Radio is a service of the National Oce- anic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) of the US Department of Trade. Weather news flashes are repeated every 4 to 6 minutes and are routinely updated at intervals of 1 to 3 hours, and more often when necessary. Most stations operate 24 hours a day. In case of a storm, the National Weather Service interrupts the routine weather news and transmits special warning messages instead. If you have a question about NOAA Weather Radio, please contact the near- est office of the National Weather Service. Details are also provided on the Internet at www.nws.noaa.gov.

Calling up weather news flashes 1. Select "WB" and press the controller.

2. Select a station.

The station for weather news flashes may be unavailable in some regions.

High Definition Radio* Many stations transmit both analog and digital signals. You can receive these stations digitally and with improved sound quality.

A digital radio network must be available in order to receive digital stations.

Activating/deactivating digital radio reception 1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Audio" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field. Turn the controller until "HD radio" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Off" and press the controller.

The reception of digital stations is activated.

This symbol is displayed when a station is being received digitally.

With some stations the digital signals are not transmitted simultaneously with the analog sig- nals. If you are in an area in which the selected station is not continuously received digitally,

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

167

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

playback switches between analog and digital reception. This can result in repetitions or inter- ruptions. In this case it may be advisable to deactivate digital radio reception.

Selecting programs of a digital station* Some stations transmit several programs. To select one of these programs:

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler.

2. Select "Manual" and press the controller.

3. Select a station that is received digitally. This symbol is displayed when a station

is being received digitally.

4. Switch to the next program of the dig- ital station with the buttons on the radio or the steering wheel.

You can store a station, refer to page 164.

Updating stations offering digital reception If you are on a longer journey and leave the transmission range of the stations originally set, you can update the list of stations with the best reception signal.

1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control- ler.

2. Change into the second field from the top.

3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.

4. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

5. Select "Autostore " and press the con- troller.

The display of the stations offering digital reception is updated. This can take up to 2 minutes.

Displaying additional information With the digital stations, additional information on the current track is displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.

1. Select a station and press the controller.

2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

R ad

io

168

The information is displayed.

If a digital station is received again when the station is changed, the additional information will be displayed again following a brief interrup- tion.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

169

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Satellite radio

You can receive up to 100 different channels with high sound quality.

The channels are offered to you in predefined packages. To receive the channels of your choice, you must have this package enabled.

With this new technology the signal may fail, causing interruptions in reception.<

Enabling or disabling channels 1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".

3. Select "SAT".

4. Press the controller.

The channels are displayed. These channels are enabled.

Enabling 1. Select a channel that has not yet been

enabled and press the controller. A telephone number and the electronic serial number, ESN, are displayed.

The electronic serial number is required for enabling or disabling.<

2. To enable the channels: Dial phone number.

Disabling 1. Select an enabled channel and press the

controller.

2. Select "ESN" and press the controller. The electronic serial number, ESN, is dis- played.

The electronic serial number is required to disable.<

3. To have the channels disabled: Dial phone number.

*

S at

el lit

e ra

d io

170

Selecting and storing channel 1. Select "SAT" and press the controller.

Channels or categories appear in the Con- trol Display.

2. Select a menu item:

> "Presets": Up to twelve channels you have stored previously.

> "All channels": All channels are displayed.

> "Categories": All channels sorted by category, e.g. news, jazz.

3. Press the controller.

4. If "Categories" has been selected: Select the desired category and press the controller.

The channels of this category are displayed.

5. Select a channel marked with this sym- bol.

6. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

7. Select "Play" and press the controller.

Additional information The name of the channel and additional infor- mation on the current track are displayed, e.g. the name of the artist.

1 Artist

2 Track

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

171

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Storing channel 1. Select the desired channel.

2. Press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

3. Select "Store" and press the controller.

"Presets" is displayed.

4. Turn the controller to select a memory posi- tion and press the controller.

The channel is stored. The stations of the last selection criterion are displayed again after a short time.

Changing channel with buttons next to CD player Press the button for the corresponding direction. The system changes to the next enabled chan- nel.

Notes If no signal can be received for more than 4 seconds, a message is displayed on the Con- trol Display.

Reception may not be possible for certain reasons, e.g. environmental influences or

topographical conditions. The satellite radio has no influence on this. The signal may not be available in tunnels or underground garages, next to tall buildings, near trees, mountains or other sources of radio interference. Reception is usually possible again as soon as the signal is available again.<

C D

p la

ye r a

n d

C D

c h

an g

er

172

CD player and CD changer

Listening to CDs

Compressed audio files* CDs with compressed audio files, i.e. MP3, can be played by the CD player, but not by the CD changer.

CD player: starting CD

With two drives: The upper drive is for audio CDs.

Insert the CD into the drive with the labeled side up. The CD is automatically pulled in. Playback starts automatically if the sound out- put is on. For CDs with compressed audio files, it can take up to approx. 1 minute to read in the data depending on the directory structure.

To start playback when there is already a CD in the drive:

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "CD" is selected and press the controller.

4. With a CD changer, change to the second field from the top and turn the controller until "CD" is selected and press the control- ler. The CD player is started.

Playback starts automatically if the sound out- put is switched on.

With programmable memory/ direct selection buttons You can store the function CD player on the programmable memory/direct selection but- tons to start the CD player, refer to page 21.

Press the button next to CD player. The CD emerges slightly from the drive.

*

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

173

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

CD changer: starting CD Fill the CD magazine and insert, refer to page 176.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "CD" is selected and press the controller.

4. Change to the second field from the top if necessary. Turn the controller until the desired CD, CD 1 - 6, is selected and press the controller.

At the end of the last track, the next CD will be selected.

If the CD magazine has been newly filled, play- back begins with the lowest CD, e.g. CD 1, track 1.

The CD magazine's load status is indicated on the Control Display.

With programmable memory/ direct selection buttons You can store a CD compartment of the CD changer on the programmable memory/direct selection buttons to start the CD changer, refer to page 21.

Selecting a track

Buttons next to CD player Press the button for the corresponding direction repeatedly until you reach the desired track. The CD will start to play at the start of the track. The track is displayed on the Control Display.

You can also change the track with buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

Via iDrive Select a track by turning the controller.

Compressed audio files* 1. Select the directory if necessary and press

the controller.

2. Select the track and press the controller.

C D

p la

ye r a

n d

C D

c h

an g

er

174

To change the directory: Select the directory and press the controller.

To exit from the menu: Select the arrow and press the controller.

You can store a certain track on the program- mable memory/direct selection buttons, refer to page 21.

Displaying information on track* With compressed audio files, you can display possibly included information about the current track, e.g. the name of the artist.

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

The information about the current track is dis- played.

From radio readiness, the setting for the remote control used at the moment is saved.

Sampling tracks, scan The system automatically plays a brief sample from each of the tracks on the current CD.

1. Select "Set" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

To end sampling:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.

This cancels sampling of the tracks, and the player remains on the current track.

Compressed audio files* 1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the desired menu item:

> To sample all tracks of the current direc- tory, select "Scan directory" and press the controller.

> To sample all tracks of the CD, select "Scan all" and press the controller.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

175

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

To end scan search:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and press the controller.

This cancels the scan search and the player remains on the current track.

Repeating track 1. Select "Set" and press the controller.

Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

The current track on the CD is repeated.

To cancel repeat mode:

1. Press the controller again.

2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.

Compressed audio files* 1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the desired menu item:

> To repeat the selected track, select "Repeat track" and press the controller.

> To repeat all tracks of the current direc- tory, select "Repeat directory" and press the controller.

To cancel repeat mode:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory" and press the controller.

Random play sequence In this mode, the tracks on the current CD are played once in a random sequence.

1. Select "Set" and press the controller. Other menu items are displayed.

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

To cancel random mode:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

Compressed audio files* 1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select the desired menu item:

> To play all tracks of the current directory in random order, select "Random direc- tory" and press the controller.

C D

p la

ye r a

n d

C D

c h

an g

er

176

> To play all tracks of the CD in random order, select "Random all" and press the controller.

To cancel random mode:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all" and press the controller.

Fast forward/reverse Buttons next to CD player:

Press and hold the button for the corre- sponding direction.

CD magazine The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in the glove compartment.

Removing CD magazine To insert CDs into the CD magazine 1 or remove them from it, you must first remove the magazine from the CD changer:

Press button 2 to eject the CD magazine 1.

Wait at least 2 seconds before pushing in the magazine again so that the inserted CDs can be read in again.

Inserting/removing CDs into/from CD magazine When inserting or removing CDs, remember to hold them only by their edges, taking care to avoid touching the reflective CD memory sur- face.

To insert: Insert one CD into each compartment of the magazine with the labeled side up.

To remove: Pull out the desired tray and remove the CD.

Inserting CD magazine

Push in the CD magazine as far as possible in the direction of the arrow.

The CD changer automatically reads in the inserted CDs and is then ready for operation.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

177

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Notes BMW CD/DVD players and changers are officially designated Class 1 laser prod-

ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged, otherwise severe eye damage can result. Do not use self-recorded CDs with adhesive labels as these can come loose during playback due to heat build-up and cause irreparable damage to the system. Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/ DVDs with an adapter, e.g. Single-CDs, other- wise the CDs or the adapter can jam and may no longer be ejected. Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVDPlus; otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no longer eject.<

General malfunctions BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been optimized for performance in vehicles. In some instances they may be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.

If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check whether it has been inserted correctly.

Humidity High levels of humidity can lead to condensa- tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and temporarily prevent playback.

Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/ DVDs, this can be due to one of the following causes.

Home-recorded CDs/DVDs Possible reasons for malfunctions with self- recorded CDs/DVDs are, e.g., inconsistent data-creation or recording processes, or poor quality or advanced age of the CD/DVD blank.

Label CDs/DVDs only on the top, using a marker designed for this purpose.

Damaged CDs/DVDs Avoid fingerprints dust, scratches, and mois- ture. Keep CDs/DVDs in a sleeve. Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures over 1227/506, high levels of humidity or direct sunlight.

CDs/DVDs with copy protection Manufacturers often provide CDs/DVDs with copy protection. This can mean that some CDs/ DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to a limited extent.

Care If necessary, clean the reflective scanning side of the CDs/DVDs with a commercially available cleaning cloth by wiping in straight lines from the center outward.

A U

X -I

n co

nn ec

ti o

n

178

AUX-In connection

You can connect an external audio device, e.g. an MP3 player, and play the sound via the vehi- cle loudspeakers. The sound can be adjusted via iDrive.

Connecting

For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeak- ers, connect the headphones or the line-out connection of the device to the socket 1 with a 1/8 in/3,5 mm jack plug.

Starting audio playback The audio device must be switched on.

1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "AUX" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "AUX" and press the controller.

5. Adjust volume and sound if necessary.

With programmable memory/ direct selection buttons You can save the function audio AUX on the programmable memory/direct selection but- tons to start audio playback, refer to page 21.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

179

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

USB/audio interface

You can connect audio devices to the USB/ audio interface, e.g. an iPod or a USB device (MP3 player, USB memory stick). You can then operate these va iDrive.

The system can play back common audio files, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM) and ACC, as well as playback lists in the M3U format.

Due to the large number of audio devices avail- able on the market, operation via the vehicle cannot be ensured for every audio device.

Ask your BMW center which audio devices are suitable.

Connecting

1 USB interface

2 Connection for audio playback: 1/8 in/3,5 mm jack plug

iPod To connect the iPod, use the BMW cable adapter for Apple iPods. For more information, please contact a BMW center or consult our website: www.bmw.com

For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeak- ers, connect the iPod to the connections 1 and 2.

The menu structure of the iPod is supported by the USB/audio interface.

USB storage medium Use a flexible adapter cable for connec- tion to protect the USB interface and your

USB device against mechanical damage.<

For audio playback via the vehicle loudspeak- ers, connect the USB device to the connec- tion 1.

After connecting for the first time, the informa- tion of all tracks (e.g. artist, music genre) and the playback lists of the USB device are trans- ferred to the vehicle. This process can take some time. The time required is dependent on the USB device and on the number of tracks.

During the transfer you can select the tracks via the directories and file names.

Following the transfer you can call up the tracks via the information and playback lists.

The information of up to four USB devices can be stored in the vehicle, for a total of approx. 20,000 tracks.

If a fifth USB device is connected, the informa- tion of the tracks of the first USB device stored in the vehicle is deleted.

Music tracks with integrated Digital Rights Management (DRM) cannot be

played.<

*

U S

B /a

u d

io in

te rf

ac e

180

Starting audio playback

Via iDrive If the audio device has a device name, this will be displayed if possible.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller backwards to open "Entertainment".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "AUX" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "USB" or the name of the audio device and press the controller.

5. The playback starts with the first track.

With programmable memory/ direct selection buttons You can save the function "USB" on the pro- grammable memory/direct selection buttons to start audio playback, refer to page 21.

Selecting a track You can call up the tracks via the playback lists and information. With USB devices you can also call up the tracks via the file directory.

1. Make your selection, e.g. "Playlists" or "Art- ists", and press the controller.

2. Select the track and press the controller.

Displaying information on track You can display any information stored on the current track, e.g. the name of the artist.

1. Press the controller during playback.

2. Select "Details" and press the controller.

The information about the current track is dis- played.

N a

vi g

a ti

o n

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

D ri

vi n

g t

ip s

181

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls C

om m

un ic

at io

ns M

o b

il it

y

Repeating track 1. Select the current track and press the con-

troller.

2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con- troller.

To cancel repeat mode:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con- troller.

Random play sequence You can play back the tracks of the selected list in random order, e.g. all tracks of an artist.

1. Select the current track and press the con- troller.

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

End random playback:

1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.

Fast forward/reverse Buttons next to CD player:

Press and hold the button for the corre- sponding direction.

Notes Do not subject the audio device to extreme environmental conditions, e.g.

extremely high temperatures, refer to the oper- ating instructions of the audio device. Other- wise, the audio device can be damaged and the resulting distraction can reduce road safety while driving.<

Depending on the configuration of the audio files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s, proper playback cannot always be ensured.

Connecting instructions > The USB/audio interface supplies the con-

nected audio device with power, provided the audio device supports this function. It is therefore unnecessary to connect the audio device to a socket in the vehicle during operation.

> Do not force the plug into the USB interface.

> Do not connect any devices, e.g. fans or lamps, to the USB/audio interface.

> Do not connect USB hard disks.

> Do not use the audio interface to recharge external devices.

Communications This chapter summarizes how to operate your mobile phone using iDrive or voice control and

how to use BMW Assist or TeleService.

T el

ep ho

n in

g

184

Telephoning

The concept Your BMW is equipped with a full mobile phone preparation package. After a suitable mobile phone has been paired in the vehicle once, you can operate the mobile phone via iDrive, with the buttons on the steering wheel and by voice.

A mobile phone that has been paired once is automatically detected again as soon as it is brought back inside the vehicle, provided that the engine is running or the ignition is switched on. The pairing data of up to four mobile phones can be stored simultaneously. If several mobile phones are detected simultaneously, the most recently paired mobile phone can be operated via the vehicle.

Using a phone in your vehicle

Using snap-in adapter* The so-called snap-in adapter, a mobile phone cradle, enables the battery to be charged and the mobile phone to be connected to the exter- nal antenna of your vehicle. This ensures improved network reception and a consistent voice reproduction quality. Ask your BMW cen- ter which mobile phones snap-in adapters are offered for.

For your safety A car phone makes life more convenient in many ways, and can even save lives in an emer- gency. While you should consult your mobile phone's separate operating instructions for a detailed description of safety precautions and information, we request that you direct your particular attention to the following:

Only make entries when traffic conditions allow you to do so. Do not hold the mobile

phone in your hand while you are driving; use the hands-free system instead. If you do not observe this precaution, your being distracted

can endanger vehicle occupants and other road users.<

Suitable mobile phones Ask your BMW center which mobile phones with a Bluetooth interface are supported by the mobile phone preparation package or which mobile phones will fit in the snap-in adapters they offer. These mobile phones support the functions described in this Owner's Manual, provided they are running a certain software version. Malfunctions can occur with other mobile phones.

Care instructions You can find what you need to know about car- ing for your mobile phone in the separate Caring for your vehicle brochure and in the mobile phone operating instructions.

Operating options You can operate the mobile phone* using:

> Buttons on steering wheel, refer to page 11

> iDrive, refer to page 16

> Voice commands, refer to page 195

> Programmable memory/direct selection buttons, refer to page 21

Avoid operating a mobile phone detected by the vehicle with the keypad of the mobile phone, otherwise malfunctions can occur.

Placing phone calls with BMW Assist system*: BMW Assist calls You can use the BMW Assist system via the hands-free unit for BMW Assist calls.

When the status information "BMW Assist" or "BMW Service" is displayed in "Communica- tion", only BMW Assist calls are possible.

*

185

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

It may not be possible to establish a telephone connection using the mobile phone while a con- nection is being established to BMW Assist or while a call to BMW Assist is already in progress. If this happens, you must unpair the mobile phone and the vehicle if you wish to place a call with the mobile phone.

Initial operation

Pairing mobile phone in vehicle The following prerequisites must be met:

> Suitable mobile phone: the mobile phone is supported by the full mobile phone prepara- tion package. Information on this subject is also provided on the Internet at: www.bmw.com

> The mobile phone is ready to operate.

> The Bluetooth links of the vehicle, refer to page 189, and the mobile phone are active.

> Depending on the mobile phone, presets in the mobile phone are required: e.g. via the following menu items:

> Bluetooth activated

> Connection not with confirmation

> Reconnect

> Depending on the mobile phone model, the setting energy saving mode can, for exam- ple, result in vehicle failing to detect the paired mobile phone.

> Specify any desired number as the Blue- tooth passkey, e.g. 1, for pairing. This Blue- tooth passkey is no longer required follow- ing successful pairing.

> The ignition is switched on.

Only pair the mobile phone with the vehi- cle stopped, otherwise the passengers

and other road users can be endangered due to a lack of attentiveness on the part of the driver.<

Switching on ignition 1. Insert the remote control as far as possible

into the ignition lock.

2. Switch on the ignition by pressing the Start/ Stop button without depressing the brake or clutch pedal.

Preparation via iDrive iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

3. Press the button to open the start menu.

4. Press the controller to open the menu.

5. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

6. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

T el

ep ho

n in

g

186

7. Change into the second field from the top, select "Phone" and press the controller.

8. Select "Pair new phone" and press the con- troller.

9. Select "Start pairing" and press the control- ler.

The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis- played.

Preparation with mobile phone 10. Additional operations must be carried out

on the mobile phone and differ depending on the model, refer to the operating instruc- tions of your mobile phone, e.g. find, con- nect or pair under Bluetooth device. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is also shown on the mobile phone display.

11. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on the mobile phone display.

Pairing Depending on your mobile phone, you will first be requested consecutively via the display of your mobile phone or iDrive to enter the Blue- tooth passkey you specified.

12. Enter the Bluetooth passkey. Depending on the mobile phone, approx. 30 seconds are available for entering the Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone and on the Control Display.

13. Change into the third field from the top, select "Confirm passkey" and press the controller.

14. Wait a few seconds until the "Communica- tion" menu appears.

The next time you use the mobile phone in the vehicle interior, it will be detected within a max- imum of 2 minutes with the engine running or the ignition switched on.

With some mobile phone models it may be necessary to make certain settings for

a permanent Bluetooth link, e.g. via the menu item Authorization or Secure connection. Refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone.<

187

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

As soon as a mobile phone is detected by the vehicle, the phone book entries stored on the SIM card or on your mobile phone are transmit- ted to your vehicle. This transmission is depen- dent on your mobile phone, refer to the operat- ing instructions of your mobile phone if necessary, and can take several minutes.

If not all phone book entries are displayed:

> Transfer all phone book entries from the SIM card to the mobile phone if necessary.

> It may not be possible to display phone book entries with special characters.

Up to four mobile phones can be paired consec- utively. When you pair a fifth mobile phone, the pairing data of the mobile phone for which the pairing data were stored first in the vehicle will be deleted.

Check if pairing is unsuccessful > Is the mobile phone supported by the

mobile phone preparation package? Infor- mation on this subject is also provided on the Internet at: www.bmw.com.

> Do the Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone and the vehicle match? The same Bluetooth passkey must be entered both on the mobile phone display and via iDrive.

> Have you required longer than 30 seconds to enter the Bluetooth passkey?

> Only a limited number of devices can be connected to the mobile phone. Delete the connection to other devices if necessary.

> The mobile phone no longer reacts? Switch the mobile phone off and then on again or disconnect the power supply.

To repeat pairing:

1. Select "Restart pairing" and press the con- troller.

2. Repeat steps 9 to 14.

If pairing was repeatedly unsuccessful, contact BMW Customer Relations.

To call BMW Customer Relations:

Select "Help" and press the controller.

The phone number of BMW Customer Rela- tions and information required for pairing is shown on the display. With mobile phones already paired, you can select the phone num- ber of BMW Customer Relations to establish the connection.

T el

ep ho

n in

g

188

List of paired mobile phones The mobile phones for which the vehicle has stored the pairing data can be displayed. If sev- eral paired mobile phones are detected by the vehicle simultaneously, you can operate the mobile phone highest up in the list via the vehi- cle.

You can change the order of the mobile phones in the list. As long as a mobile phone is selected in this list, the mobile phones cannot be oper- ated via the vehicle.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button to open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

5. Change into the second field from the top, select "Phone" and press the controller.

6. Select the desired mobile phone.

With two drives:

> Move the controller to the rear to change into the bottom field.

> Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.

With a single drive:

> Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.

7. Select "Move device up" and press the con- troller.

The selected mobile phone is moved upward by one position.

Unpairing mobile phone from vehicle If you no longer want to operate a mobile phone via the vehicle, you can delete the pairing data of the mobile phone.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Switch off the mobile phone.

2. Press the button to open the start menu.

3. Press the controller to open the menu.

4. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller. "Bluetooth" is selected.

6. Change into the second field from the top, select "Phone" and press the controller.

7. Select the desired mobile phone.

With two drives:

> Move the controller to the rear to change into the bottom field.

> Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.

With a single drive:

> Select the desired mobile phone and press the controller.

189

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

8. Select "Delete device" and press the con- troller.

The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from the list. The phone book entries and the lists of stored phone numbers are also deleted.

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth link Bluetooth technology is not approved in all countries. Observe the applicable local

regulations. Temporarily deactivate the Blue- tooth link between the vehicle and the mobile phone if necessary. If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you cannot operate your mobile phone via the vehicle and the mobile phone can use other devices with a Bluetooth interface, e.g. a laptop computer.<

To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link between your vehicle and your mobile phone:

1. Remove the mobile phone from the cradle and switch it off.

2. Press the button to open the start menu.

3. Press the controller to open the menu.

4. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

5. Select "Bluetooth" and press the controller.

6. Change into the second field from the top, select "Settings" and press the controller.

7. Select "Bluetooth communication active" and press the controller to activate or deac- tivate the link.

The Bluetooth link is activated. The Bluetooth link is deactivated.

T el

ep ho

n in

g

190

Adjusting volume

Turn the knob during a call to select the desired volume.

This volume for the hands-free system is main- tained, even if the other audio sources are set to minimum volume.

You can also adjust the volume with the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Operation via iDrive You can operate the following functions via iDrive:

> Accepting/rejecting a call

> Dialing phone numbers

> Dialing phone numbers from the phone book

> Dialing stored phone numbers, e.g. from the list of accepted calls

> Ending a call

When the ignition and radio readiness are switched off, e.g. after removing the remote control from the ignition lock, you can continue an ongoing call via the hands-free system for no more than 25 minutes.

Speech quality If the person you are talking to cannot under- stand you well, this may be due to excessively loud background noises. The full mobile phone preparation package can compensate for these noises to a certain degree.

To optimize the speech quality during a call, we recommend that you:

> Reduce background noises, e.g. by closing the windows, reducing the air volume of the automatic climate control or pointing the opened front vent outlets downward.

> Reduce the volume of the hands-free sys- tem.

Requirements > The pairing data of the mobile phone are

stored in the vehicle and the mobile phone is ready to operate.

> The engine is running or the ignition is switched on.

> The mobile phone is detected by the vehi- cle.

Opening Communication You operate many of the functions described in the following via the "Communication" menu.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button to open the start menu.

2. Move the controller forward to open "Com- munication".

Receiving calls If you have the phone number of the caller stored in the phone book and the phone num- ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry is displayed.

191

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

Accepting a call Press the button on the steering wheel.

Alternative:

"Accept" is selected. Press the controller.

Rejecting a call Select "Reject" and press the controller. The caller is diverted to your mailbox if it has been activated.

Calling

Dialing phone numbers 1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select "Dial" and press the controller.

3. Enter the desired phone number by dialing the individual digits and pressing the con- troller. Always enter the complete phone number consisting of national dialing code, area code, and phone number. The letters correspond to the digits on the keypad of the mobile phone.

To delete the last digit: Move the controller toward the right to select the arrow and press the control- ler.

4. Select "Dial number" and press the control- ler.

Alternative: Press the button on the steering wheel.

For your phone number to be displayed to the person you are calling, the display of phone numbers must be enabled by your service pro- vider.

With programmable memory/ direct selection buttons You can store phone numbers on and call them up with the programmable memory/direct selection buttons, refer to page 21.

Ending a call Press the button on the steering wheel.

Alternative:

1. Select the phone number and press the controller.

T el

ep ho

n in

g

192

2. "End call" is selected: Press the controller.

Dialing a phone number from phone book or a phone number stored in a list Phone numbers you have called, incoming calls and the entries of the phone book are stored in lists when the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth. If the caller is entered in the phone book, the name of the entry is dis- played instead of the phone number. You can select the desired subscriber from the list and establish the connection.

Five lists are available:

> "A - Z" The entries of the mobile-phone phone book, consisting of the name and phone number, are sorted alphabetically.

> "Top 8" The eight numbers called most frequently from the phone book "A - Z" are automati- cally stored in the Top 8 list.

> "Redial" The last eight phone numbers you have dialed are automatically stored. The last number dialed is at the top of the list.

> "Missed calls" The phone numbers of the last eight calls which were not accepted are stored. This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been sent.

> "Received calls" The phone numbers of the last eight accepted calls are stored. This requires the telephone number of the caller to have been sent.

Dialing phone numbers from phone book The list "A - Z" is available for you phone book entries. The phone book entries appear on the Control Display.

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.

3. To limit the number of displayed entries, select the first letter of the desired entry and press the controller.

4. Select the desired entry and press the con- troller.

5. Select "Call" and press the controller. The system dials the number.

If different phone numbers are stored in the mobile phone under one name, e.g. office and home, the name is shown once for each phone number.

You can change a phone number stored in the phone book, e.g. to call a specific extension:

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select "A - Z" and press the controller.

3. Select the desired entry and press the con- troller.

4. Select "Add digits" and press the controller.

193

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

5. Change the phone number.

6. Select "Dial number" and press the control- ler.

Dialing a phone number stored in a list To select an entry and establish a connection:

1. Select "Phone" and press the controller.

2. Select list and press the controller:

> "Top 8"

> "Redial"

> "Missed calls"

> "Received calls"

3. Select the desired entry and press the con- troller.

4. Select "Call" and press the controller. The system dials the number.

Deleting individual entries 1. Select the desired entry from the list and

press the controller.

2. Select "Delete" and press the controller.

The entry is deleted.

Deleting entire list 1. Select an entry from the list and press the

controller.

2. Select "Delete all numbers" and press the controller.

3. If applicable, select "Yes" and press the controller. The list is deleted.

BMW Contact* If you have not enabled BMW Assist, you can have several service numbers displayed:

> Roadside Assistance* of the BMW Group when you require breakdown assistance

> BMW center, e.g. when you want to make an appointment for service

> BMW Customer Relations* for information on all aspects of your vehicle

If BMW Assist is enabled, refer to page 199.

T el

ep ho

n in

g

194

You can dial the displayed service phone num- bers if your mobile phone is paired in the vehi- cle:

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".

3. Select "BMW Contact" and press the con- troller.

4. Select "BMW Contact Numbers" and press the controller.

5. Select one of the following menu items and press the controller:

> "Roadside Assistance"

> "Customer Relations"

> "Service Request"

6. Select "Call" and press the controller.

Contact is established.

Transferring phone number via tone dialing method The tone dialing method is required for access to network services or for controlling devices, e.g. remote checking of an answering machine.

This function is available when a connection has been established.

1. Establish connection.

2. With a single drive: Press the controller. Select "Keypad" and press the controller. With two drives: Move the controller backwards until the bottom field is selected.

3. Select the desired characterand press the controller. Each character is sent immediately and confirmed by a tone depending on the mobile phone model.

195

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

Changing between mobile phone and hands-free system

From mobile phone to hands-free system* You can continue calls begun outside the Blue- tooth range of the vehicle via the hands-free system when the engine is running or the igni- tion is switched on. Depending on your mobile phone, the system automatically switches over to the hands-free mode.

For mobile phones that do not automatically switch over to the hands-free mode:

> Depending on the mobile phone model used, the conversation can be continued via the hands-free system if necessary. Follow the instructions displayed on the mobile phone display, refer to the operating instructions of your mobile phone.

> Press the button above the storage compartment. Switching over may take several seconds.

From hands-free system to mobile phone When you telephone via the hands-free system, you can also continue the call via the mobile phone if necessary, depending on the mobile phone model. Act according to what is shown on the mobile phone display, refer to the oper- ating instructions of your mobile phone.

As an alternative, you can deactivate the Blue- tooth link.

Depending on your mobile phone model, poor reception of the wireless communications net- work can result in the system switching from the hands-free system to the mobile phone.

Operation by voice*

The concept You can operate your mobile phone without having to remove your hands from the steering wheel. When making your entries, you will be supported by announcements or questions in many cases.

The same prerequisites as for operation via iDrive apply, refer to page 190.

Voice commands

Activating system 1. Briefly press the button on the steering

wheel. An acoustic signal indicates that you can say commands.

2. Say the command.

Ending/canceling operation by voice Press the button on the steering wheel or

In dialogs where text is spoken, not a command, e.g. a name, canceling is only possible using the button on the steering wheel.

Having possible commands read aloud The system understands default commands that must be spoken word for word. You can have the possible commands spoken by the system at any point:

Using alternative commands There are often a number of commands to run a function, e.g.:

The system recognizes digits from zero to nine.

You can say each digit individually or group them into a sequence to accelerate the input.

{Cancel}.

{Help}.

{Dial name} or {Name}.

T el

ep ho

n in

g

196

Example: dialing phone numbers Start the dialog:

Press the button on the steering wheel.

Setting volume of instructions You can adjust the volume for the instructions from the system:

Turn the knob during instructions.

This volume for the instructions is maintained, even if the other audio sources are set to mini- mum volume.

The setting is stored for the remote control cur- rently in use.

Calling

Dialing phone numbers

The connection to the desired subscriber is established.

Correcting phone number After the last spoken sequence of digits has been repeated by the system, you can delete this sequence of digits.

The command {Correct number} can be repeated as often as you like.

Deleting phone number

All digits entered up to this point are deleted.

Voice phone book Operating by voice requires a personal voice phone book.

> With separate drives for audio CDs and nav- igation DVDs, the entries are automatically adopted from your mobile phone's memory.

> With a single drive, the entries must be input by voice and are independent of your mobile phone's memory. In this case, it is not possible to use voice command either to call phone numbers stored in the mobile phone or to store new numbers. Up to 50 entries can be input. An entry always consists of a name and phone number.

You say The voice control answers

{Dial number} {{Please say the number}}

e.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on equipment: {{123 456 7890. Continue?}} or {{123 456 7890. And next?}}

{Dial} {{Dialing number}}

1. {Dial number}.

2. Say the phone number. For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus} and then the country code.

3. {Dial}.

{Correct number}. The digits are deleted.

{Delete}

197

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

Creating and editing voice phone book* Save entry:

An entry always consists of a name and phone number.

Delete entry:

You can delete any entry from the voice phone book.

Delete all entries:

{Delete phone book} deletes all entries in the phone book.

Have entries read aloud and dial:

You can have all the entries of your voice phone book read aloud in the order of input and select a certain entry to establish a connection:

Selecting an entry The connection to the phone number of the selected entry is established.

Redialing The {Redial} command calls up "Redial".

Notes

Important for voice commands For voice commands, keep the following in mind:

> Issue the commands smoothly and at nor- mal volume, avoiding excessive emphasis and pauses.

> Keep the doors, windows and glass sunroof closed to prevent interference from ambi- ent noise.

> Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking.

Mounting/removing snap-in adapter 1. Press the area 1 around the button and

remove the cover.

1. {Save name}.

2. Say the name. The spoken length of the names in the phone book must not exceed approx. 2 seconds.

3. Say the phone number after being requested to do so by the system.

4. To store the phone number: {Save}.

1. {Delete name}. The dialog for deleting an entry is opened.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.

1. {Delete phone book}. The dialog for deleting phone book is opened.

2. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.

3. Confirm the repeated prompt with {Yes}.

1. {Read phone book}. The dialog for reading phone book is opened.

2. {Dial number} when the desired entry is read aloud.

1. {Dial name}. The dialog for selecting an entry is opened.

2. Say the name when prompted.

3. Confirm the prompt with {Yes}.

T el

ep ho

n in

g

198

2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front and press down until it engages.

To remove the snap-in adapter: Press the area 1 around the button.

Inserting mobile phone 1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile

phone's antenna connector if necessary, so that the mobile phone can engage in the snap-in adapter.

2. With the buttons facing upward, press the mobile phone toward the electrical connec- tions and press down until it engages.

From radio readiness or with the steering unlocked the mobile phone's battery is charged.

To protect the vehicle's batteries, avoid using the phone when the ignition is

switched off.<

Removing mobile phone

Press button.

199

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

BMW Assist

BMW Assist provides you with various services. For example, the position data of your vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center if an emergency request* has been initiated.

Many BMW Assist services depend on the indi- vidually agreed contract.

After your contract has expired, the BMW Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW Assist Response Center without you having to visit a BMW center. Following the deactivation of the BMW Assist systems, no BMW Assist service is available. The BMW Assist system be reactivated by a BMW center after signing a new contract.

Requirements You can use BMW Assist when the following requirements are met:

> The installed BMW Assist system is logged on to a mobile phone network. This network must be capable of transmitting the ser- vices.

> To transmit position data, the vehicle must be able to determine the current position.

> In order to activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS signal must be available.

> You have subscribed to BMW Assist with your BMW center or with the BMW Assist Response Center. Enabling must have been completed.

> BMW Assist is activated, refer to page 204.

Offered services The following services are available via BMW Assist:

> Emergency request, refer to page 227: When you press the SOS button, a connec- tion is established to the BMW Assist Response Center. The BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and takes further steps to help you.

> Automatic collision notification: Under certain conditions a connection is established to the BMW Assist Response Center directly following a serious accident. If possible, the BMW Assist Response Cen- ter contacts you and takes further steps to help you.

> Enhanced roadside assistance: You can call Roadside Assistance* of the BMW Group should you require help in the event of a breakdown. If possible, the vehi- cle and position data are transmitted in the process.

> BMW Customer Relations: For information related to your vehicle, call BMW Customer Relations.

> TeleService: The data on the service status of your vehi- cle or on required inspections are transmit- ted to your BMW center either automati- cally prior to the due date or when you request a BMW service appointment.

> Remote door unlock: Inform the BMW Assist Response Center, e.g. if your remote control is not available and you want to have the vehicle unlocked.

> Stolen vehicle recovery: After your vehicle has been reported to the police as stolen, the BMW Assist Response Center can locate its position. To do this, the vehicle electronics must be ready for operation.

*

B M

W A

ss is

t

200

In addition, you can be provided with other ser- vices, e.g. the concierge service or information on route planning, traffic conditions, and the weather. With Critical Calling, you can make a limited number of calls via the BMW Assist Response Center, e.g. if you do not have your mobile phone with you. Press the SOS button to contact the BMW Assist Response Center, see below.

You also have access to the BMW Assist con- cierge service via the Internet.

Characteristics of the offered services The following characteristics apply to the ser- vices:

> The services offered are country-specific.

> Voice contact is established or data are transferred, depending on the equipment and the country. In some countries, it is possible to do both.

> The data transmitted can, for example, be the vehicle data, your current position or the CBS Condition Based Service data.

Using services

Contacting BMW Assist Response Center You can contact the BMW Assist Response Center via the SOS button.

1. Briefly press protective cover to open. With some vehicle equipment packages or in the Convertible, the arrangement of the switches and indicator lamps may differ somewhat.

2. Press the button for at least 2 seconds.

The BMW Assist Response Center is con- tacted.

Roadside assistance iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Roadside Assistance" and press the controller.

If the location can be determined, the cur- rent vehicle position is displayed.

201

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

5. Select "Start service" and press the con- troller.

The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you to the Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group.

TeleService

Automatic service notification* The data on the service status of your vehicle or on required inspections are transmitted auto- matically prior to the due date. You can check when the BMW center was notified.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Info sources" and press the control- ler.

4. Select "Service" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Service notification" and press the controller.

Manual service notification You can transmit data regarding your vehicle's service status to your BMW center when you wish to arrange a service appointment.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Service Request".

5. Press the controller.

6. Select "Start service" and press the con- troller.

B M

W A

ss is

t

202

The data relevant for service are transmitted. Your BMW center will contact you to set up an appointment for service.

Contacting BMW Customer Relations For information on all aspects of your vehicle, you can contact BMW Customer Relations.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Customer Relations".

5. Press the controller.

6. Select "Start service" and press the con- troller.

You are connected to the BMW Hotline by the BMW Assist Response Center.

Concierge service* When you call the concierge service of BMW Assist, you can, for example, obtain infor- mation on current events, filling stations or hotels and have their phone numbers and addresses transmitted. Many hotels can be booked directly through the BMW Assist Con- cierge service.

The concierge service must be enabled sepa- rately by the BMW Assist Response Center.

Calling up information 1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Move the controller forwards to select "Communication".

3. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "BMW Assist" is selected and press the controller.

4. Select "Concierge" and press the control- ler.

5. Select "Start Service" and press the con- troller.

The BMW Assist Response Center will connect you with a BMW Assist Concierge.

203

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

Displaying transmitted data Select the received message if necessary and press the controller.

Dialing a phone number or transferring an address for destination guidance 1. Select "Options" and press the controller.

2. Select a menu item:

> With "Call" you can establish a telephone connection. A prerequisite for this is that your Bluetooth mobile phone has been paired with the vehicle.

> Press "Select as destination" to transfer the address to the navigation system for desti- nation guidance.

Updating BMW Assist

Displaying and updating services You will be notified of any changes in the ser- vices offered by BMW Assist. In this case, you should update the service functions.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set- tings" is selected and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service Status" is selected and press the controller. The currently available BMW Assist ser- vices are displayed.

6. If applicable, select "Options" and press the controller.

7. Select "Update services" and press the controller.

B M

W A

ss is

t

204

Blocking services* If you block the services, the connection to BMW Assist is deactivated.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set- tings" is selected and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service Status" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Options" and press the controller.

7. Select "Terminate services" and press the controller.

The use of BMW Assist is blocked, and the cur- rent vehicle position will not be transmitted dur- ing an emergency request*. To cancel blocking and reactivate BMW Assist, see below. This does not affect the contractual agreements.

Reactivate BMW Assist if necessary to log on again.

Activating BMW Assist BMW Assist must be activated to use the ser- vices.

Requirements > Make sure that the vehicle can determine its

current position. Reception is best when you have an unobstructed view to the sky.

> Leave radio readiness switched on during the activation process.

Activating 1. Press the button.

This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is selected and press the controller.

205

E n

te rt

a in

m e

n t

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n M

o b

il it

y

4. Turn the controller until "BMW Service set- tings" is selected and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service Status" is selected and press the controller.

6. Select "Enable services" and press the con- troller. BMW Assist is activated and the data exchange with the BMW Assist Response Center begins.

Activation takes a few minutes. The status is displayed on the Control Display. If you open another menu, the activation process continues to run in the background.

Displaying vehicle data When BMW Assist is activated, the license plate and the vehicle identification number of your vehicle may be displayed.

1. Open the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.

4. Select "BMW Service settings" and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Profile" is selected and press the controller.

Mobility This section helps you maintain your

mobility by supplying important information on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,

wheels and tires, service, maintenance and roadside assistance.

R ef

u el

in g

208

Refueling

Switch off the engine before refueling, otherwise no fuel can be filled into the

tank and a message is displayed.<

When handling fuel, always observe all applicable precautionary measures and

regulations. Never transport reserve fuel con- tainers in the vehicle. They can leak and cause an explosion or a fire in an accident.<

Fuel filler door

To open and close: briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler door.

Unlocking manually

In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can release the fuel filler door manually:

In the luggage compartment, pull the knob with the gas pump symbol on the right side panel.

Observe the following when refueling When handling fuels, follow the safety precautions posted at the filling station.

Otherwise, there is a danger of personal injury and property damage.<

Place the fuel filler cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler door.

When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com- pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid raising the filler nozzle during refueling, otherwise this

> results in premature pump shutoff

> can lead to reduced efficiency in the fuel- vapor recovery system

The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time.

Fuel tank capacity Approx. 18.5 US gal/70 liters, including the reserve capacity of approx. 2.6 US gal/10 liters.

Refuel as soon as possible once your cruising range falls below 30 miles/

50 km, otherwise engine functions are not ensured and damage can occur.<

Fuel filler cap

Closing Insert the cap and turn it clockwise until there is a clearly audible click.

Do not crush the band attached to the cap; otherwise, the cap may not properly

seal and fuel vapors can escape.<

A message* is displayed if the cap is loose or missing.

M o

b il

it y

209

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Fuel specifications Never used leaded gasoline; it will perma- nently damage the catalytic converter.

Do not use E85, i.e. fuel that consists of 85% ethanol, or Flex Fuel. Otherwise permanent damage to the engine and the fuel supply sys- tem will result.<

Required fuel

Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91 This gasoline is highly recommended.

However, you may also use gasoline with less AKI. The minimum AKI rating is 87.

If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI rat- ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high outside temperatures. This has no affect on the engine life.

Do not use gasoline below the specified minimum quality, otherwise engine dam-

age can result.<

Use high-quality brands Field experience has demonstrated significant differences in fuel quality: volatility, composi- tion, additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale in the United States and Canada. Fuels containing up to and including 10% ethanol or other oxygenates with up to 2.8% oxygen by weight, that is, 15% MTBE or 3% methanol plus an equivalent amount of co-solvent, will not void the applicable warranties with respect to defects in materials or workmanship.

The use of poor-quality fuels may result in problems relating to drivability and start-

ing, and to a tendency to stall, especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude. Should you encounter drivability problems which you suspect could be related to the fuel you are using, we recommend that you respond by switching to a recognized high-quality brand such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. Failure to comply with these recommendations may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

210

Wheels and tires

Tire inflation pressure

Information for your safety The condition of the tires and the maintenance of the specified tire pressure are crucial not only to the tire's service life, but also to driving com- fort and most importantly, driving safety.

Checking pressure Only check tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. This means after a maximum of 1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are warm, the tire inflation pressure increases.

Check the tire inflation pressure regularly and correct it as needed: at least twice a

month and before starting long trips. Other- wise, driving instability or tire damage, and therefore accidents, can result from incorrect tire inflation pressures.<

After correcting the tire inflation pressure, reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to

page 89, or reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 91.<

Pressure specifications The tables below provide all the correct inflation pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient temperature.

The inflation pressures apply to the tire sizes and tire brands respectively

approved and recommended by BMW; a list of these is available from your BMW center.<

For correct identification of the right tire infla- tion pressure for your tires, observe the follow- ing:

> Tire sizes for your vehicle

> Load conditions

> Maximum allowable driving speed

Tire inflation pressures for driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h For normal driving up to 100 mph/160 km/h, adjust pressures to the respective tire inflation pressures listed on the following pages in the column for traveling speeds up to a max. of 100 mph/160 km/h to achieve optimum driving comfort.

These pressure specifications can be found on the door post when you open the driver's door.

The permissible top speed for these tire inflation pressures is 100 mph/160 km/h.

Do not exceed this speed; otherwise, tire dam- age and accidents may result.<

Tire inflation pressures for driving above 100 mph/160 km/h

In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please

note the tire pressures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h listed in the relevant column of the table on the following pages and adjust your tire inflation pressures as needed. Other- wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.<

Observe all national and local maximum speed limits, otherwise violations of the law could occur.

M o

b il

it y

211

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Tire inflation pressures for 650i Coupe

Tire inflation pressures for 650i Convertible

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds up to max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding

100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

245/45 R 18 96 V M+S 245/50 R 17 99 H M+S

32/220 33/230 32/220 33/230 33/230 39/270

Front: 245/45 R 18 96 W Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 W

32/220 33/230 32/220 33/230 33/230 39/270

Front: 245/40 R 19 94 W Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 W

32/220 33/230 32/220 33/230 33/230 39/270

Front: 245/35 R 20 91 W Rear: 275/30 R 20 93 Y

32/220 33/230 32/220 33/230 33/230 39/270

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 237.

Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa

Traveling speeds up to max. of

100 mph/160 km/h

Traveling speeds including those exceeding

100 mph/160 km/h

All pressure specifications in the table are indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires. Cold = ambient temperature

245/45 R 18 96 V M+S 245/50 R 17 99 H M+S

32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320

Front: 245/45 R 18 96 W Rear: 275/40 R 18 99 W

32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320

Front: 245/40 R 19 94 W Rear: 275/35 R 19 96 W

32/220 38/260 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320

Front: 245/35 R 20 91 W Rear: 275/30 R 20 93 Y

32/220 39/270 32/220 38/260 39/270 46/320

More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 237.

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

212

Tire identification marks Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire makes it easier to identify and choose the right tires.

Tire size

Speed letter T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h

H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h

V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h

W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h

Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h

Tire Identification Number Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the US Department of Transportation.

DOT code:

Tire age The tire's date of manufacture is indicated on the sidewall: DOT ... 3307 indicates that the tire was manu- factured in week 33 of 2007.

BMW recommends replacing all tires at least every 6 years, even if some tires may last for 10 years.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Tread wear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades Tread wear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition

to these grades.<

Tread wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov- ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1, times as well on the govern- ment course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to varia- tions in driving habits, service practices and dif- ferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test sur- faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac- teristics.<

e.g.

Nominal width in mm Aspect ratio in Belted construction radial Rim diameter in inches Carrying capacity ID-code (not in ZR tires) Speed code letter (in ZR tires before the R)

245/45 R 18 96 W

e.g.

Manufacturer code for tire make Tire size and tire design Tire age

DOT xxxx xxx 3307

M o

b il

it y

213

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Temperature The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi- cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep- arately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.<

RSC run-flat tires You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, refer to page 214.

M+S Winter and all-season tires. These have better winter properties than sum- mer tires.

Tire condition Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear, signs of damage and foreign objects lodged in the tread, and check the tread depth.

Minimum tread depth The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/ 3 mm, although, for example, European legisla- tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/ 3 mm, there is an increased risk of high-speed hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of water are present on the road surface.

Winter tires noticeably loose their suitability for winter use below a tread depth of 0.16 in/4 mm. New tires should be mounted in the interest of safety.

Wear indicators at the tread-groove base, refer to arrow, are distributed over the tire's circum- ference and are marked on the side of the tire with TWI Tread Wear Indicator. If the tire tread has been driven down to the wear indicators, a tread depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm has been reached.

Wheel/tire damage Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels, tires and suspension parts to be more suscep- tible to road hazards and consequential dam- ages. Unusual vibrations encountered during normal vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam- ple, be caused by driving over curbs. These kinds of problems may also be signaled by other changes in vehicle response, such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right.

In these cases reduce your speed imme- diately and have the wheels and tires

inspected immediately. To do this, carefully drive to the nearest BMW center or a special- ized tire dealer that works in accordance with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately trained personnel. Have the vehicle towed to the repair shop if necessary. Otherwise, tire damage can be extremely dangerous to vehicle occupants and other road users.<

W h

ee ls

a n

d ti

re s

214

Run-flat tires

You will recognize run-flat tires by the circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire. Run-flat tires consist of self-contained tires and special rims. The sidewall reinforcement ensures that the tire retains some residual safety in the event of pressure drop and driving remains possible to a restricted degree.

To continue driving with a damaged tire:

> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 90

> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Mes- sage with low tire inflation pressure, page 92

New wheels and tires Only have new wheels and tires mounted by a BMW center or a repair shop that

works in accordance with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately trained personnel. If this work is not carried out properly, there is a dan- ger of subsequent damage and related safety hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are bal- anced.<

Retreaded tires BMW does not recommend the use of retreaded tires; otherwise, driving safety

may be reduced. Potentially substantial varia- tions in the design and the age of the carcasses can result in a reduced service life.<

The right wheels and tires BMW recommends that you use only wheel and tire combinations that BMW

has tested and approved for your particular vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac- turing tolerances mean that even wheels and tires with identical official size ratings could actually have different dimensions than the approved units these differences could lead to body contact, and with it the risk of severe acci- dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability, and therefore cannot be held liable for driving safety.<

You can find out the right wheel-tire combina- tion from your BMW center.

The right wheel-and-tire combination is another vital factor in ensuring reliable opera- tion of various vehicle systems such as ABS and DSC.

To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires of a single tread config- uration from a single manufacturer. After a tire is damaged, always remember to have the original wheel and tire combination remounted on the vehicle as soon as possible.

Wheels with electronics for TPM Tire Pressure Monitor When mounting new tires or converting from summer to winter tires or vice versa, only use wheels with TPM electronics, otherwise the Tire Pressure Monitor cannot detect a flat tire, refer to page 90. Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on this subject.

M o

b il

it y

215

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Recommended tire brands

BMW recommends particular tire brands for each tire size. You can recognize these from the clearly visible BMW marking on the tire sidewall.

With proper use, these tires meet the highest standards for safety and handling characteris- tics.

Run-flat tires When installing new tires or when changing from summer tires to winter tires, for your own safety, use run-flat tires. No spare wheel is pro- vided in the event of a flat. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you.

For safety reasons, BMW recommends that you do not have damaged run-flat

tires repaired; they should be replaced. Other- wise it is not possible to rule out occurrences of consequential damage.<

Special characteristics of winter tires BMW recommends winter tires for use in cold winter driving conditions. Although all-season M+S tires provide better winter traction than summer tires, they generally fail to provide the same levels of cold-weather performance as winter tires.

Watch speed Always observe the maximum permissi- ble speed for the winter tires, otherwise

tire damage may occur, which can result in acci- dents.<

Storage Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure indicated on the side wall of the tire.

Rotating wheels between axles BMW does not recommend moving the front wheels to the rear or vice versa, as otherwise the handling characteristics may be impaired. With tires of different makes and types* such a change is not permissible.

Snow chains* BMW only tests certain fine-link snow chains, classifies them as road-safe and recommends them. Consult your BMW center for more infor- mation.

These snow chains are approved exclusively for use in pairs on the rear wheels with the tire size:

> 245/50 R 17 Y

> 245/45 R 18 Y

Observe the manufacturer's instructions when mounting snow chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h with the chains mounted.

Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after installing snow chains as this could cause

the Flat Tire Monitor to malfunction. When driving with snow chains, it may be prac- tical to briefly activate DTC, refer to page 88.<

U n

d er

th e

h o

o d

216

Under the hood

Never attempt to perform any service or repair operations on your vehicle without

the required professional technical training. If you are unfamiliar with the specifications to be observed, only have work carried out on your vehicle by a BMW center or a repair shop that works in accordance with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately trained personnel. Other- wise, there is a danger of damage and associ- ated safety risks if this work is performed improperly.<

Hood

Releasing

Pull lever.

Opening

Press the release handle and open the hood.

Closing

Close the hood from a height of approx. 16 in/ 40 cm with momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.

Make sure that the closing path of the hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may

result. If you see any signs that the hood is not com- pletely closed while you are driving your vehicle, you should stop at once and close it securely.<

M o

b il

it y

217

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Engine compartment

1 Filler spout for engine oil, refer to Adding engine oil

2 Jump-starting terminal, refer to page 228

3 Filler neck for washer fluid of the headlamp and windshield cleaning systems, refer to page 65

4 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to page 219.

U n

d er

th e

h o

o d

218

Engine oil Engine oil consumption depends on driving style and driving conditions.

Checking engine oil level Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic oil level check.

The condition for the most accurate indication of the oil level possible is measurement with the engine at operating temperature, i.e. following an uninterrupted drive of at least 6 miles/10 km. You can display the oil level on the Control Dis- play while driving or when stopped on a level surface with the engine running.

iDrive, for operating principle refer to page 16.

1. Press the button. This opens the start menu.

2. Press the controller to open the menu.

3. Turn the controller until "Info sources" is selected and press the controller.

4. Turn the controller until "Service" is selected and press the controller.

5. Change to upper field if necessary. Turn the controller until "Service requirements" is selected and press the controller.

6. Change to the second field from the top if necessary. Turn the controller until "Engine oil level" is selected and press the control- ler. The oil level is displayed.

Possible messages > "Engine oil level O.K."

> "No measurement available: Updating engine oil level measurement...": Engine oil level is being measured. This process can take approx. 1 minute when stopped on a level surface with the engine running and approx. 5 minutes while driv- ing. If the engine oil has been topped off, the measurement of the oil level can take up to 30 minutes.

> "Oil level at the minimum! Refill with 1 quart of engine oil.": Add a maximum of 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil at the next opportunity, refer to Adding engine oil below. Add at least 0.5 US quart/0.5 liter. Otherwise the oil level control may not display the new value correctly. If the oil level displayed is below minimum, add engine oil immediately. Failure to do so may lead to engine damage.

> "Engine oil level too high":

Have the vehicle checked immedi- ately; otherwise, engine damage may

result if too much oil has been added.<

> "Please observe recalculated service inter- val for engine oil": Do not add engine oil. Before continuing to drive, note the recalculated remaining mile- age until the next oil change service, refer to Service requirements on page 77. Have the system checked as soon as possible.

M o

b il

it y

219

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Adding engine oil

Do not add 1 US quart/liter of oil until a corre- sponding message is shown on the Control Dis- play.

Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km, otherwise the engine could be dam-

aged.<

Continuous exposure to used oil has caused cancer in laboratory testing.

For this reason, thoroughly wash exposed areas of skin with soap and water after such work. Keep oil, grease, etc. out of reach of children and observe warnings on containers. Failure to do so could pose health risks.<

Oil change Have oil changes carried out only by a BMW center or a repair shop that works in accordance with BMW guidelines and uses appropriately trained personnel.

Approved engine oils The quality of the engine oil selected has critical significance for the operation and service life of an engine. BMW continuously approves spe- cific oils after confirming their suitability for use in its vehicles with extensive testing.

Only use approved BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil.

If BMW High Performance Synthetic Oil is unavailable, you can add small quantities of other synthetic oils between oil changes. Only use oils of the specification API SM or higher.

Your BMW center will be happy to answer detailed questions on BMW High Perfor-

mance Synthetic Oil or approved synthetic oils.<

You can also call BMW of North America at 1-800-831-1117 or visit the website at www.bmwusa.com to obtain this information.

Do not use oil additives; under some cir- cumstances, they can damage your

engine.<

Viscosity grades The viscosity is a measure of the thickness of the oil and is specified in SAE grades.

The choice of the right SAE grade is based on the climatic conditions in the region in which you normally drive your BMW.

Approved oils belong to the SAE grades 5W-40 and 5W-30.<

These oils can be used at all temperatures.

Coolant Do not open the cooling system when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant can cause

burns.<

Coolant is composed of equal parts water and a coolant additive. Not all commercially available additives are suitable for your BMW. Ask your BMW center for suitable additives.

Only use suitable additives, otherwise engine damage may result. The additives

present a health hazard.<

Always observe all applicable environ- mental laws and regulations when dis-

posing of used coolant additives.<

U n

d er

th e

h o

o d

220

Checking coolant level

1. Do not open the hood until the engine has cooled down.

2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank counter- clockwise to allow any accumulated pres- sure to escape, then continue turning to open.

3. The coolant level is correct when it lies between the MIN and MAX mark, also refer to the drawing next to the filler neck.

4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level do not overfill.

5. Turn the cap until it clicks.

6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi- nated as soon as possible.

M o

b il

it y

221

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Maintenance

BMW Maintenance System

The BMW Maintenance System supports the preservation of the traffic and operating safety of your BMW. The service schedule also includes operations related to the vehicle's comfort and convenience features, such as replacement of the filters for the inside air. The ultimate objective is to ensure economical maintenance by providing the ideal service for your vehicle.

Should the day come when you decide to sell your BMW, you will find that a complete dealer service history is an asset of inestimable value.

CBS Condition Based Service Sensors and special algorithms take the differ- ent driving conditions of your BMW into account. Condition Based Service uses this to determine the current and future service requirements. By letting you define a service and maintenance regimen that reflects your own individual requirements, the system builds the basis for trouble-free driving.

You can set the Control Display to show remaining distances and times of selected maintenance intervals and legally mandated deadlines, refer to page 77:

> Engine oil

> Brake pads, front and rear separately

> Brake fluid

> Vehicle check

> Legally required tests depending on local regulations

Service data in remote control Your vehicle stores the information required for maintenance continuously in the remote con- trol during driving. After accessing the data stored in the remote control, your BMW Service Advisor can suggest precisely the right array of service procedures for your own individual vehi- cle. For this reason, when you take your vehicle in for service, you should give the BMW Service Advisor the remote control last used to drive it.

Make sure the date is set correctly, refer to page 83, otherwise the effectiveness

of CBS Condition Based Service is not ensured.<

Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models for additional information on service require- ments.

BMW recommends that you have service and repair operations performed at your

BMW center. Take the time to ensure that these service pro- cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi- cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet for US models and Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. These entries verify that your vehicle has received the speci- fied regular maintenance.<

M ai

n te

n an

ce

222

Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnostics interface

Components which are decisive for the exhaust-gas composition can be checked via the OBD socket with a device.

This socket is located under a cover on the left side of the driver's footwell, directly under the instrument panel.

Exhaust-gas values The warning lamp lights up. The exhaust-gas values are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as

possible.

Display of the previously described malfunction on Canadian models.

The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This is a sign of excessive misfiring of the engine. In this case, you should reduce speed and drive to the nearest BMW center as soon as possible. Heavy engine misfiring causes serious damage to the emission-relevant components, espe- cially the catalytic converter, within a short time.

If the fuel filler cap is not properly tight- ened, the OBD system can detect the

escape of fuel vapor. This causes a display to light up. If the cap is then tightened, the display should go out within a few days.<

Event data recorders Your vehicle may be equipped with one or sev- eral measuring and diagnosis modules, or with a device for recording or transmitting certain vehicle data or information. If you have also sub- scribed to BMW Assist, then certain vehicle data can be transmitted or recorded to enable corresponding services.

Care Important information on care and maintenance of your BMW is contained in the Caring for your vehicle brochure.

M o

b il

it y

223

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Replacing components

Onboard tool kit

The onboard tool kit is located in the luggage compartment under the floor mat.

Replacing wiper blades

1. Fold the wiper arm out and grasp it firmly.

2. Press the locking tabs together while slid- ing the wiper blade toward the front to dis- engage it.

3. Insert the new wiper blade and slide it in until it audibly clicks into place.

Lamps and bulbs Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu- tion to driving safety. You must be duly diligent in replacing them. If you are not familiar with the specified procedures, have the corresponding work carried out at your BMW center.

Never touch the glass on new bulbs with your bare fingers, as even minute

amounts of contamination will burn into the bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a clean cloth, napkin, etc., or hold the bulb by its metal socket.<

A selection of replacement bulbs is available at your BMW center.

Whenever you perform any work on the electrical system, turn off the electrical

devices involved to prevent short circuits from occurring. To avoid possible injury or equip- ment damage when replacing bulbs, follow any instructions provided by the bulb manufac- turer.<

When performing maintenance on the head- lamps, follow the instructions in the separate Caring for your vehicle brochure.

For bulbs for which changing is not described, and for checking and adjusting

headlamp aim, please contact your BMW cen- ter.<

Light-emitting diodes LEDs Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu- cent lenses serve as the light source for many of the controls and displays in your vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which operate using a concept similar to that applied in conventional lasers, are officially designated as Class 1 light- emitting diodes.

Do not remove the covers, and never stare into the unfiltered light for several

hours, as irritation of the retina could result.<

R ep

la ci

n g

c o

m p

o n

en ts

224

Xenon lamps The service life of these lamps is very long and the probability of a failure is very low, provided that they are not switched on and off an unusual number of times. If one of these bulbs should nevertheless fail, it is possible to continue driv- ing with great caution using the fog lamps, pro- vided traffic laws in your area do not prohibit this.

Have work on the xenon lighting system performed only by your BMW center or a

workshop that works according to BMW repair procedures with correspondingly trained per- sonnel. Due to the high voltage involved, there is a danger to life and limb when work is carried out improperly.<

Parking lamps, roadside parking lamps, daytime running lamps

The illustration shows the front left side of the engine compartment.

35-watt bulb, H 8

1. Remove the cover cap 1 by pressing the tab and removing the cover cap upward.

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove.

3. Remove and replace the bulb.

Always wear gloves and eye protection the atmosphere inside the H8 bulb is

pressurized. Otherwise, there is a danger of injuries if the bulb is accidentally damaged dur- ing replacement.<

Side-mounted turn signals 5-watt bulb, WY5W

1. Press against the front edge of the lamp with the tip of your finger, then push it to the rear, release the snap connection at the front and take it off the trim strip.

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left by 905 and remove.

3. Remove and replace the bulb.

Tail lamps The parking lamps, tail lamps, brake lamps, and turn signals use LED technol-

ogy. The backup lamps are equipped with long- life bulbs. Please contact a BMW center in case of a malfunction.<

1 Turn signals

2 Roadside parking, tail and brake lamp

3 Reflector

4 Backup lamp

M o

b il

it y

225

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

License plate lamps

5-watt bulb, W5W

1. Push a screwdriver from the left under the lamp and pry out the lamp toward the right.

2. Turn the bulb holder to the left by 905 and remove.

3. Remove and replace the bulb.

Changing wheels Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as a standard feature. An immediate wheel change in the event of a flat tire is therefore no longer required.

To continue driving with a damaged tire:

> With Flat Tire Monitor, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 90

> With Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to Mes- sage with low tire inflation pressure, page 92

You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular symbol containing the letters RSC on the side of the tire, refer to Run-flat tires on page 214.

If you have new tires mounted or switch from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, use run- flat tires because no spare tire is provided in case of a flat. Your BMW center will be glad to advise you. Also refer to New wheels and tires, page 214.

The suitable tools for changing tires are available as accessories from your BMW

center.<

Car jacking points

The jacking points for the car jack are located in the positions shown.

Vehicle battery

Maintenance The battery is 100% maintenance-free, i.e., the electrolyte will last for the life of the battery when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli- mate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in all matters concerning the battery.

Charging battery Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the terminals in the engine compartment with the engine switched off. For the connections, refer to Jump starting on page 228.

Disposal After replacement, have old batteries dis- posed of by your BMW center or deposit

them at a recycling center. Maintain the battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Always secure the battery to prevent it from tip- ping over during transport.<

R ep

la ci

n g

c o

m p

o n

en ts

226

Power failure After a temporary power supply interruption, some settings are lost. Take the following steps:

> Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory Store the positions again, refer to page 49.

> Time and date Reset, refer to text starting on page 82.

> Radio Store stations again, refer to page 164.

> Navigation system Wait until the system starts, refer to page 132.

Fuses Never attempt to repair a blown fuse, and do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-

stitute of another color or amperage rating, as this could lead to overloading of the wiring, ulti- mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<

Spare fuses and a pair of plastic tweezers are located in the compartment for the onboard tool kit, refer to page 223.

Information on fuse allocation is located below the bracket for the onboard tool kit, see below.

In glove compartment 1. Press the button on the back in the center of

partition 1 and pull out the partition upward, arrow 2.

2. Press the coupling downward, arrow 3, and fold the lid 4 forward.

In luggage compartment

Fold the cover under the floor mat upward and remove the bracket for the onboard tool kit. Information on fuse allocation 1 and additional fuses 2 are provided there.

M o

b il

it y

227

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

Giving and receiving assistance

Emergency request Conditions for an emergency request:

> Full preparation package mobile phone. With this equipment, an emergency request is still possible when no mobile phone is paired in the vehicle.

> BMW Assist is activated. Activating BMW Assist, refer to page 204.

> Radio readiness is activated.

> The BMW Assist system is logged on to a mobile phone network.

> The emergency request system is opera- ble.

Once your service contract for BMW Assist expires, the BMW Assist system can be deacti- vated by a BMW center without you having to visit a workshop. Following deactivation of the BMW Assist system, no emergency requests can be made. The BMW Assist system can be reactivated after concluding a new agreement at a BMW center.

Initiating an emergency request 1. Briefly press protective cover to open.

With some vehicle equipment packages or in the Convertible, the arrangement of the switches and indicator lamps may differ somewhat.

2. Press the SOS button for at least 2 seconds.

The LED in the button lights up. As soon as the voice connection to the BMW Assist Response Center has been established, the LED flashes.

When the emergency request is received at the BMW Assist Response Center, the BMW Assist Response Center contacts you and arranges for additional steps to help you.

If conditions allow, remain in the vehicle until the connection has been established. You will then be able to provide a detailed description of the situation.

If the current position of your vehicle can be determined, it will be transmitted to the BMW Assist Response Center.

If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist Response Center cannot be heard over the hands-free system, it is possible that the hands-free system is malfunctioning. You may still be heard by the BMW Assist Response Center, however.

Under certain conditions, an emergency request is automatically initiated immediately after a severe accident. The automatic collision notification is not affected by the button being pressed.

For technical reasons, the emergency request cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable condi- tions.

You can also use other services of BMW Assist with this button, refer to

page 199.<

G iv

in g

a n

d re

ce iv

in g

a ss

is ta

n ce

228

Warning triangle*

The warning triangle is located on the left-hand side in the luggage compartment.

First-aid kit* The first-aid kit is located in the filler element of the rear seat backrest.

1. Press the button downward and pull the filler element forward.

2. Take out first-aid kit.

To refit the filler element, insert the two bottom tabs into the strip and press the

filler element back into place. Make sure that you do not damage the rear seat upholstery.<

Some of the articles contained in the first-aid kit have a limited service life. For this reason, check the expiration dates of each of the items regu- larly and replace any whose expiration dates have passed.

Roadside Assistance* BMW Roadside Assistance offers you assis- tance in the event of a breakdown around the clock, including on weekends and public holi- days.

The phone numbers of the Roadside Assis- tance in your home country can be found in the BMW Contact directory.

With BMW Assist you can contact the Roadside Assistance of the BMW Group for assistance in the event of a breakdown directly via iDrive, refer to page 200.

Jump starting When your battery is discharged, you can use two jumper cables to start your BMW with power from the battery in a second vehicle. You can also use the same method to help start another vehicle. Use only jumper cables with fully-insulated clamp handles.

To avoid the risk of potentially fatal injury, always avoid all contact with electrical

components while the engine is running. Care- fully adhere to the following sequence, both to prevent damage to one or both vehicles, and to guard against possible personal injuries.<

Preparing 1. Check whether the battery of the other

vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volts and approximately the same capacitance in Ah. This information can be found on the bat- tery.

2. Switch off the engine of the vehicle provid- ing assistance.

3. Switch off any electrical systems and com- ponents in both vehicles.

M o

b il

it y

229

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

There must not be any contact between the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,

there is a danger of short circuiting.<

Connecting jumper cables To avoid personal injury from sparks, fol- low this sequence when connecting

jumper cables.<

In your BMW, the so-called jump-starting termi- nal for jump starting in the engine compartment serves as a positive terminal for the battery, also refer to engine compartment overview on page 217. The cover cap is marked with a +.

1. Fold open the cover of the BMW jump- starting terminal. To do so, pull the tab.

2. Attach one end of the jumper cable plus/+ to the positive terminal of the battery or a jump-starting terminal of the vehicle provid- ing assistance.

3. Attach the second end of the cable to the positive terminal of the battery or to a jump- starting terminal of the vehicle to be started.

4. Attach one end of the jumper cable minus/ to the negative terminal of the battery or to an engine or body ground of the vehicle providing assistance. Your BMW has a special nut as body ground or negative terminal.

5. Attach the second end of the cable to the negative terminal of the battery or to the engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started.

Starting engine 1. Start the engine on the assisting vehicle

and allow it to run at idle for several minutes at slightly increased speed.

2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before another attempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge.

3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.

4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing the connection sequence.

Check the battery and recharge if necessary.

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.<

Tow-starting and towing Observe applicable laws and regulations for tow-starting and towing.<

Do not transport any passengers other than the driver in a vehicle that is being

towed.<

Using tow fitting The threaded tow fitting is stored in the tool kit mounted on the inside of the luggage compart- ment under the floor mat, refer to page 223, and should always remain in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the front or rear of the BMW.

Only use the tow fitting that comes with the vehicle and screw it in as far as possi-

ble. Use the tow fitting for towing only on roads. Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, the tow fitting and vehicle can be damaged.<

G iv

in g

a n

d re

ce iv

in g

a ss

is ta

n ce

230

Access to screw thread Press the arrow symbol on the cover in the bumper.

Front

Rear

Being towed Make sure that the ignition is switched on, refer to page 58; otherwise, the low-beam

headlamps, tail lights, turn signals and wind- shield wipers would not be available. Do not tow the vehicle with the rear axle raised, as other- wise the steering can turn to the left or right. When the engine is stopped, there is no power assist. This then requires increased effort for braking and steering. Active steering is deacti- vated and larger steering wheel movements are required.<

Switch on the hazard warning flashers depend- ing on the local regulations. If the electrical sys- tem fails, mark the vehicle to be towed, e.g. with a sign or warning triangle in the rear window.

Manual transmission Gearshift lever in neutral position.

Sport automatic transmission Before towing, manually release the transmission lock, even if there is no mal-

function in the transmission. Otherwise there is a risk that the transmission lock will automati- cally be engaged during towing.<

Manually unlocking and locking transmission lock, refer to page 62.

Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph/ 70 km/h and a towing distance of

90 miles/150 km; otherwise, the sport auto- matic transmission may be damaged.<

Towing methods Do not lift vehicle by tow fitting or body and chassis parts; otherwise, damage

may result.<

In some countries, towing with tow bars or ropes in public traffic is not permitted. Familiar- ize yourself with the regulations on towing in the respective country.

With tow bar The towing vehicle may not be lighter than the vehicle to be towed; otherwise, it

will not be possible to reliably control vehicle response.<

The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi- ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an offset angle, please note the following:

> Clearance and maneuvering capability will be strictly limited during cornering.

> When mounted at an angle, the tow bar will exert lateral forces, tending to push the vehicle sideways.

Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only, as attachment to other vehicle parts can

lead to damage.<

M o

b il

it y

231

R e

fe re

n ce

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t

With tow rope When starting off in the towing vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut.

To avoid jerking and the associated stresses on vehicle components when

towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps. Attach tow ropes to the tow fittings only, as attachment to other vehicle parts can lead to damage.<

With tow truck

Have the BMW transported with a tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a flat bed.

Tow-starting Do not tow-start the vehicle if possible, but instead start the engine by means of jump start- ing, refer to page 228. Vehicles equipped with a catalytic converter should only be tow-started when the engine is cold. When equipped with a sport automatic transmission, the engine can- not be started by tow-starting.

1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers, comply with country-specific regulations.

2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 58.

3. Shift into 3rd gear.

4. Tow-start with the clutch completely depressed and slowly release the clutch. After the engine starts, immediately depress the clutch again completely.

5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn- ing flashers.

6. Have the vehicle checked.

Reference This chapter contains the technical data,

the short commands of the voice command system, and the index that will direct you as quickly as possible to the information

you are looking for.

T ec

h n

ic al

d at

a

234

Technical data

Engine data

650i

Displacement cu in/cm 292.8/4,799

No. of cylinders 8

Maximum output hp 360

at engine speed rpm 6,300

Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 360/488

at engine speed rpm 3,400

R e

fe re

n ce

235

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Dimensions

Coupe

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 37.4 ft/11.4 m

T ec

h n

ic al

d at

a

236

Convertible

All dimensions given in inches/mm. Smallest turning circle diam.: 37.4 ft/11.4 m

R e

fe re

n ce

237

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Weights

Never exceed either the approved axle loads or the gross vehicle weight.

Capacities

650i Coupe 650i Convertible

Curb weight lbs./kg 3,814/1,730 4,277/1,940

Approved gross vehicle weight lbs./kg 4,652/2,110 5,049/2,290

Load lbs./kg 838/380 772/350

Approved front axle load lbs./kg 2,337/1,060 2,403/1,090

Approved rear axle load lbs./kg 2,491/1,130 2,778/1,260

Luggage compartment capacity cu ft/l 15.9/450 10.6/300

> with raised convertible top compartment floor, refer to page 35 cu ft/l 12.4/350

Notes

Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 18.5/70 Fuel specification: page 209

including reserve of: US gal/liters approx. 2.6/10

Window and headlamp wiper system US quarts/liters approx. 5.3/5

For details: page 65

S h

o rt

c o

m m

an d

s o

f v o

ic e

co m

m an

d s

ys te

m

238

Short commands of voice command system

With short commands you can run certain func- tions directly, regardless of which menu item is selected.

Here are the important short commands for the voice command system.

Assistance window

Communication

*

Function Command

To open the assistance window 20 {Assistance window}

To select the display in the assistance window 20 {Assistance window map facing north}, {Assistance window map direction of travel}, {Assistance window arrow display}, {Assistance window perspective}, {Assistance window current position}, {Assistance window trip computer} or {Assistance window onboard info}

To change scale in assistance window 132 {Assistance window scale ... feet} or {Assistance window scale ... miles}

Function Command

To activate telephone 191 {Phone}

To dial phone number 191 {Dial number}

To display the phone book 192 {A to Z}

To dial from phone book 192 {Call ...} or {Dial name}

To display "Top 8" 193 {Top 8}

To redial 193 {Redial}

To display "Received calls" 193 {Received calls}

To display "Missed calls" 193 {Missed calls}

To display "Bluetooth" 185 {Bluetooth}

To open BMW Assist 199 {BMW Assist}

To open BMW Service, Services 199 {BMW Service}

To open "BMW Contact" 193 {BMW Contact}

To open "BMW Contact Numbers" 201 {BMW Contact numbers}

To open "Roadside Assistance" 200 {Roadside Assistance}

R e

fe re

n ce

239

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Navigation

Onboard info

Function Command

To open navigation 132 {Navigation}

To open "Enter address" {Enter address}

To open "New destination" {New destination}

To display "Input map" {Input map}

To display destination list {Destination list}

To display the address book {Address book}

To display the route criteria {Route preference}

To start destination guidance {Start guidance}

To end destination guidance {Stop guidance}

To display arrow display {Arrow display}

To display map view {Map}, {Map facing north}, {Map direction of travel} or {Perspective}

To change scale {Scale ... miles} or {Scale ... feet}

To display streets and towns/cities of the route {Route list}

To switch on voice instructions {Navigation info on}

To switch off voice instructions {Navigation info off}

To repeat voice instructions {Repeat navigation info}

To open route {Route menu}

To display current position {Current position}

Function Command

To open "Car Data" 76 {Car data}

To display the computer 76 {Onboard info}

To display the trip computer 76 {Trip computer}

To start the stopwatch 82 {Stopwatch}

To set the speed limit 81 {Limit}

To activate speed limit 81 {Limit on}

To deactivate speed limit 81 {Limit off}

S h

o rt

c o

m m

an d

s o

f v o

ic e

co m

m an

d s

ys te

m

240

Entertainment

Function Command

Tone control 159 {Audio}

To switch on radio 162 {Radio on}, {FM} or {AM}

To open "FM" 162 {FM menu}

To open "AM" 162 {AM menu}

To open "All stations" 162 {FM All stations}

To select the radio station 162 {Station ...}, e.g. {Station WNYC}, or {Choose station}

To open "Presets" 162 {FM presets} or {AM presets}

To select preset radio station 162 {Preset ...}, e.g. {Preset 1}

To open "Manual" 163 {FM manual}, {AM manual} or {Choose frequency}, {Frequency ... Megahertz}

To open the radio station with the best reception 164

{AM Autostore}

To open "WB" 166 {Weatherband menu}

To switch on weatherband 166 {Weatherband on}

To select a weatherband station 166 {Choose weatherband station}

To open "SAT" 170 {SAT radio menu}

To switch on satellite radio 170 {SAT radio}

To open "Presets" of satellite radio 171 {SAT radio presets}

To open "All channels" of satellite radio 170 {SAT radio all channels}

To open "Categories" of satellite radio 170 {SAT radio categories}

To select CD player 172 {CD menu}

To switch on CD player 172 {CD}

To select CD changer 173 {CD changer menu}

To switch on CD changer 173 {CD changer}

To select a CD in the CD changer 173 {CD 1...6}

To select music track 173 {CD track ...}

To select a CD and music track in the CD changer 173

{CD 1...6 track ...}

To switch on audio playback with external audio device 178

{Audio Aux}

R e

fe re

n ce

241

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Climate

menu

Function Command

To open "Vent settings" 110 {Vent settings}

To open "Automatic programs" 109 {Automatic programs}

To open "Parked car ventilation" 113 {Parked car operation}

To open "Automatic ventilation" 113 {Automatic ventilation}

To display the activation times 113 {Activation time}

Function Command

To open the menu {Settings menu}

"Display off" 21 {Display off}

To open "Info sources" {Info sources}

To open "Settings" {Settings}

To open "Door locks" 30, 32 {Door locks}

To open "Steering wheel buttons" 55 {Steering wheel buttons}

To open "Lighting" 64, 103 {Lighting}

To open "Service requirements" 77, 201 {Service requirements}

To open "Service" 77, 201 {Service}

To open "BMW Service settings" settings 203 {BMW service settings}

To display "Check Control messages" 79 {Check Control messages}

To open "Head-Up Display" 97 {Head-up display}

To adjust the brightness of the Control Display 83

{Brightness}

To open "Units" 84 {Units}

To open "Languages" 84, 132 {Language}

To open "Time" 82 {Time}

To open "Date" 83 {Date}

To open "PDC" 86 {PDC}

To open "FTM" 89 {FTM}

To open "TPM" 91 {TPM}

To display "Bluetooth" 185 {Bluetooth}

To activate BMW Night Vision 99 {Night Vision on}

To deactivate BMW Night Vision 100 {Night Vision off}

To display settings for BMW Night Vision 100 {Night Vision settings}

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

242

Everything from A to Z

Index

"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to select individual functions, and indicates where to find them in the text.

A ABS Antilock Brake

System 86 indicator lamp 88 ACC, refer to Active cruise

control 66 Accepted calls 192 Accessories 6 Accident, refer to Emergency

request 227 Activated-charcoal filter for

automatic climate control 112

Activating hour signal 83 "Activation time" for parked-

car ventilation 113 Active cruise control 66 indicator lamp 70 radar sensor 71 selecting distance 69 warning lamps 70 Active front head restraints 50 Active steering 93 warning lamp 93 Adapter for spare key 28 Adaptive brake assistant 87 Adaptive brake lamps, refer to

Brake force display 93 Adaptive Head Light 104 "Add digits" for mobile

phone 192 Additives coolant 219 engine oil, refer to Approved

engine oils 219

"Address book" for navigation system 142

Address for navigation deleting 143 entering 134, 137 selecting 142 storing 142 storing current position 142 "Add to address book" 141 "Add to destination

list" 137, 139 Adjusting interior

temperature 109 Adjusting thigh support 48 Adjusting tone in audio mode,

refer to Tone control 159 "After door opened" 50 "After unlocking" 50 Airbags 94 deactivating, refer to

Exception for front passenger seat 56

indicator/warning lamp 95 indicator lamp for front

passenger airbags 95 sitting safely 47 Air distribution automatic 109 manual 110 Airing, refer to Ventilation 112 Air outlets, refer to

Ventilation 112 Air recirculation, refer to AUC

Automatic recirculated-air control 111

"Air recirculation on / off" 55 Air supply, automatic climate

control 108 Air volume 110 AKI, refer to Fuel

specifications 209

Alarm system 35 avoiding unintentional

alarms 36 interior motion sensor 36 switching off alarm 35 switching off tilt alarm

sensor and interior motion sensor 36

tilt alarm sensor 36 "All channels" 170 "All doors" 30 All-season tires, refer to

Winter tires 215 "All stations", calling up with

radio 162, 165 Alterations, technical, refer to

For your own safety 6 "AM", reception

range 158, 162 Antenna, refer to Caring for

your vehicle brochure Antenna for mobile phone 184 Antifreeze coolant 219 washer fluid 65 Antilock Brake System

ABS 86 Anti-theft alarm system, refer

to Alarm system 35 Anti-theft system, refer to

Central locking system 30 Approved axle loads, refer to

Weights 237 Approved engine oils 219 Approved gross vehicle

weight, refer to Weights 237 Armrest, refer to Center

armrest 117 Around the center console 14 Around the steering wheel 10

R e

fe re

n ce

243

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Arrival time refer to Computer 76 refer to Starting destination

guidance 146 "Arrow display" for navigation

system 147 "Arrow display pop-up

instructions" 133 Ashtray 118 Assist, refer to

BMW Assist 199 Assistance systems, refer to

Driving stability control systems 86

Assistance window 20 "Assist. window off" 21 AUC Automatic recirculated-

air control 111 "Audio" 159, 161, 166 Audio 158 controls 158 switching on/off 158 tone control 159 volume 159 Audio device, external 117 Automatic air distribution 109 air volume 109 cruise control 65, 66 headlamp control 102 recirculated-air control

AUC 111 service notification 201 steering wheel

adjustment 49 storing stations 164 Automatic car washes 127 also refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure also refer to Comfort

access 38 Automatic climate control 108 automatic air

distribution 109 convertible program 109 switching on and off 112 ventilation with vehicle

parked 112

Automatic closing of doors, refer to Automatic soft closing 34

Automatic curb monitor 54 Automatic lighting refer to Automatic headlamp

control 102 refer to Daytime running

lamps 103 refer to High-beam

assistant 104 refer to Interior lamps 106 refer to Pathway lighting 103 refer to Welcome lamps 102 "Automatic programs" 109 Automatic soft closing 34 Automatic station search 163 "Automatic ventilation" 113 AUTO program with

automatic climate control 109

"Autostore" on the radio 162, 164

"AUX" 158, 178, 180 in audio mode 178 AUX-In connection 117, 178 Average fuel consumption 75 setting units 84 Average speed 75 "Avoid ferries" for navigation

system 145 "Avoid highways" for

navigation system 144 Avoiding freeways for

navigation 144 Avoiding unintentional

alarms 36 "Avoid tollroads" for

navigation system 145 Axle loads, refer to

Weights 237 "A - Z" 192

B Backrest contour, refer to

Lumbar support 48 Backrests, refer to Seats 48 Backup lamps, replacing

bulbs, refer to Tail lamps 224

"Balance", refer to Tone control 160

Band-aids, refer to First-aid kit 228

Bass, refer to Tone control 159

"Bass", tone control 159 Battery jump starting 228 refer to Vehicle battery 225 Battery replacement, remote

control for comfort access 38

BC button, refer to Computer 75

Being towed 230 Belts, refer to Safety belts 52 Beverage holder, refer to Cup

holders 118 Blower, refer to Air

volume 110 "Bluetooth" 185 "BMW Assist" 200 BMW Assist 199 activating 204 concierge service 202 contacting BMW Customer

Relations 202 displaying vehicle data 205 offered services 199 roadside assistance 200 TeleService 201 updating 203 "BMW Contact" 194 "BMW Contact

Numbers" 194 BMW homepage 4 BMW Maintenance

System 221

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

244

BMW Night Vision 98 activating 99 cleaning camera 100 cleaning camera, refer to

Wiper system 65 deactivating 100 making settings 100 "BMW Service settings" 203 BMW website 4 Bottle holder, refer to Cup

holders 118 Bracket for telephone or

mobile phone, refer to Snap- in adapter 197

Brake assistant 87 adaptive 87 Brake force display 93 Brake lamps replacing bulbs, refer to Tail

lamps 224 two-stage 93 Brake rotors breaking-in 124 refer to Braking safely 126 Brakes ABS Antilock Brake

System 86 brake force display 93 breaking-in 124 CBC Cornering Brake

Control 86 electronic brake-force

distribution 87 handbrake 60 refer to Braking safely 126 Brake system 124 brake pads 124 brake rotors 126 breaking-in 124 warning lamp 13, 88 Braking safely 126 Breakdown services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 228 Breaking-in 124 Breaking-in brake pads 124 Breaking-in the clutch 124

Breaking-in the differential, refer to Engine and differential 124

"Brightness" 84, 98 with BMW Night Vision 100 Brightness of Control

Display 83 Button for starting engine,

refer to Start/Stop button 58 Buttons on steering wheel 11 Bypassing route sections 150

C California Proposition 65

Warning 6 "Call" 192, 203 Call accepting 190 displaying accepted 193 ending 191 in absence 193 rejecting 191 starting 191 Calling by entering phone

number 191 from phone book 192 from Top 8 list 193 redialing 193 Can holder, refer to Cup

holders 118 Capacities 237 Car battery, refer to Vehicle

battery 225 Car care, refer to Caring for

your vehicle brochure Car-care products, refer to

Caring for your vehicle brochure

"Car Data" 76 Care 222 refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure Cargo loading securing cargo 128 stowing cargo 128 vehicle 127

Caring for artificial leather, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for leather, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for light-alloy wheels, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for plastic, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for the carpet, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Caring for the vehicle finish, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Car key, refer to Keys/remote control 28

Car phone 184 installation location, refer to

Center armrest 117 refer to Mobile phone 184 refer to separate operating

instructions Car radio, refer to Radio 162 Car wash 59, 127 refer to Before driving into a

car wash 127 refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure with comfort access 38 Catalytic converter, refer to

Hot exhaust system 125 "Categories" 170 CBC Cornering Brake

Control 86 CBS Condition Based

Service 221 "CD" 158, 172

R e

fe re

n ce

245

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

CD changer 172 controls 158 fast forward/reverse 176 installation location 176 random sequence 175 repeating a track 175 sampling a track 174 selecting a CD 173 selecting a track 173 switching on/off 158 tone control 159 volume 159 CD player 172 controls 158 fast forward/reverse 176 random sequence 175 repeating a track 175 sampling a track 174 selecting a track 173 switching on/off 158 tone control 159 volume 159 Center armrest, adjusting

height 117 Center console 14 "Central locking" 30 Central locking from inside 32 from outside 30 Central locking system 30 comfort access 36 hotel function 33 Changes, technical, refer to

For your own safety 6 Changing a wheel 225 Changing language on

Control Display 84 Changing scale for navigation

system display 148 Changing units of measure on

Control Display 84 Changing wheels 214 CHECK button 80 Check Control 79 "Check Control

messages" 80 Check Gas Cap 208 Checking air pressure, refer to

Tire inflation pressure 210

Child-restraint fixing system LATCH 56

Child restraint systems 56 Child seats, refer to

Transporting children safely 56

Chrome parts, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Cigarette lighter 119 Cigarette lighter socket, refer

to Connecting electrical devices 119

Cleaning, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

"Climate" 109 Clock 74 12h/24h format 83 hour signal 83 setting time and date 82 Closing from inside 32 from outside 30 Closing fuel filler cap 208 Clothes hooks, Coupe 118 Cockpit 10 Cold start, refer to Starting

engine 59 Comfort access 36 observe in car wash 38 replacing battery, remote

control 38 Comfort closing windows, with comfort

access with Coupe 37 with comfort access 37 "Communication" 190, 200 Compact disc refer to CD changer 172 refer to CD player 172 Compartment for remote

control, refer to Ignition lock 58

Compartments, refer to Storage compartments 117

Compressed audio files 172 Computer 75 displays on Control

Display 76 hour signal 83

"Concert hall", refer to Tone control 161

"Concierge" 202 Concierge service 202 Condensation, refer to When

vehicle is parked 126 Condition Based Service

CBS 221 "Confirmation" 31 Confirmation signals for

locking and unlocking 31 Connecting car vacuum

cleaner, refer to Connecting electrical devices 119

Consumption display, refer to Average fuel consumption 75

Consumption statistics, refer to Average fuel consumption 75

"Continue guidance to destination?" 147

"Contrast" with BMW Night Vision 100

Control Center, refer to iDrive 16

Control Display, refer to iDrive 16

setting brightness 83 switching off/on 21 Controller, refer to iDrive 16 Controls, refer to Cockpit 10 Convenient operation convertible top 31, 32 glass sunroof 31, 32 windows 31, 32 Convertible convertible program for

automatic climate control 109

opening and closing windows 39

rollover protection system 96

top 42 wind deflector 45 window and convertible top

operation with comfort access 37

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

246

Convertible top care, refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure closing manually 43 convenient operation 32 emergency closing 43 opening and closing 43 Coolant 219 checking level 220 temperature 74 Cooling, maximum 111 Cooling function, automatic

climate control 111 Cooling system, refer to

Coolant 219 Copyright 2 Cornering Brake Control

CBC 86 Country of destination for

navigation 135 Courtesy lamps, refer to

Interior lamps 106 Cradle for telephone or mobile

phone 117 Cruise control 65 active cruise control 66 Cruising range 75 Cup holders 15, 118 Curb weight, refer to

Weights 237 "Current position" 153 Current position displaying 153 entering 142 storing 142 "Curve mode" with

BMW Night Vision 100 "Customer

Relations" 194, 202 Cylinders, refer to Engine

data 234

D Dashboard, refer to

Cockpit 10 Data, technical 234 capacities 237 dimensions 235 engine 234 measurements 235 weights 237 "Date" 83 Date 74 date format 83 setting 83 "Date format" 83 "Daytime running

lamps" 103, 106 Daytime running lamps 103 replacing bulbs 224 DBC Dynamic Brake Control warning lamp 88 "Deactivated" 50 Decommissioning the vehicle,

refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Defect, tires refer to Flat Tire Monitor 89 refer to Tire Pressure

Monitor 90 Defrosting windows 110 Defrosting windows and

removing condensation 110 Defrosting windshield, refer to

Defrosting windows 110 Defrost position, refer to

Defrosting windows 110 "Delete address book" for

navigation system 143 "Delete all numbers" for

mobile phone 193 "Delete data" for navigation

system 143 "Delete" for mobile

phone 193 Destination address deleting 143 entering 134, 137

Destination for navigation destination list 141 entering via voice 137 entry 134 home address 144 selecting from address

book 142 selecting using

information 140 storing 142 Destination guidance 146 bypassing route

sections 150 canceling voice

instructions 55 changing specified

route 144 displaying route 147 distance and arrival 146 interrupting 146 starting 146 terminating/continuing 146 voice instructions 149 volume of voice

instructions 150 Destination list for

navigation 141 Destinations recently driven

to 141 "Details" in audio

mode 174, 180 "Dial" for mobile phone 191 "Dial number" 191 "Diamond button" 55 Digital clock 74 Digital radio, refer to High

Definition Radio 166 Dimensions Convertible 236 Coupe 235 Directional indicators, refer to

Turn signals 63 Direction instructions, refer to

Voice instructions 149 Directory, refer to Phone

book 192 Directory for navigation, refer

to Address book 142

R e

fe re

n ce

247

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Direct selection buttons 21 Displacement, refer to Engine

data 234 "Display" 84 Display, refer to iDrive

controls 16 Display elements, refer to

Instrument cluster 12 Displaying vehicle data 205 Display lighting, refer to

Instrument lighting 106 "Display off" 21 Displays on Control Display, refer to

iDrive 16 refer to Instrument

cluster 12 "Display settings" 84, 97 Displays on the windshield,

refer to Head-Up Display 96 Disposal battery of remote control

with comfort access 38 coolant 219 vehicle battery 225 Distance, refer to

Computer 76 Distance control, refer to

Active cruise control 66 "Distance to dest." 76 Distance to destination, refer

to Computer 76 Distance warning, refer to

PDC Park Distance Control 85

Door entry lighting, refer to Interior lamps 106

Door key, refer to Keys/ remote control 28

Door lock 32 "Door locks" 30, 78 Doors manual operation 32 remote control 30, 31 DOT Quality Grades 212 Draft-free ventilation 112 "Driver's door only" 30

Driving lamps, refer to Parking lamps/low beams 102

Driving route, refer to Displaying route 147

Driving stability control systems 86

Driving through water 126 Driving tips, refer to General

driving notes 124 Drying the air, refer to Cooling

function 111 DSC Dynamic Stability

Control 87 indicator lamp 13, 87 malfunction 88 DTC Dynamic Traction

Control 87 activating 88 indicator lamp 13, 88 DVD for navigation 132 Dynamic Drive 89 Dynamic Driving Control 62 "Dynamic route" for

navigation 145 Dynamic Stability Control

DSC 87 Dynamic Traction Control

DTC 87

E Easy entry, refer to Entering

rear 51 Easy entry/exit 54 Eject button, refer to Buttons

on CD player 158 Electrical malfunction convertible top 43 door lock 32 driver's door 32 fuel filler door 208 glass sunroof 41 luggage compartment lid 34 storage compartment, hotel

function 33 Electric convertible top 42

Electric steering wheel adjustment 54

Electronic brake-force distribution 87

Electronic oil level check 218 Emergency assistance, refer

to Roadside Assistance 228 Emergency operation, refer to

Manual operation convertible top 43 door lock 32 driver's door 32 fuel filler door 208 glass sunroof 41 hotel function 33 luggage compartment lid 34 transmission lock, sport

automatic transmission 62 Emergency release for

luggage compartment lid in luggage compartment 35

Emergency request 227 Emergency services, refer to

Roadside Assistance 228 "Enable services" 205 "End call" 192 Engine breaking-in 124 data 234 overheated, refer to Coolant

temperature 74 speed 234 starting 59 starting, comfort access 36 switching off 59 switching off when equipped

with Automatic transmission, with comfort access 38

Engine compartment 217 Engine coolant 219

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

248

Engine oil adding 219 additives, refer to Approved

engine oils 219 approved oils 219 electronic oil level check 218 interval between changes,

refer to Service requirements 77

oil change 219 oil grades, refer to Approved

engine oils 219 recommended oils 219 temperature 75 temperature gauge 75 "Engine oil level" 218 Engine output, refer to Engine

data 234 Engine overheating, refer to

Coolant temperature 74 Engine speed, refer to Engine

data 234 Engine starting, refer to

Starting engine 59 "Enter address" 134, 142 Entering address 134, 137 Entering intersection,

navigation 136 Entering rear 51 Entering town/city for

navigation 135 Entering town/city of

destination name 135 Entering zip code for

navigation 135 "Entertainment" 158 Entertainment sound output

on/off 159 Entry map for destination 139 Equalizer, refer to Tone

control 161 "Equalizer", tone control 161 "ESN" 169 ESP Electronic Stability

Program, refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 87

Event data recorders 222

Exhaust system, refer to Hot exhaust system 125

Exterior mirrors 53 adjusting 53 automatic dimming

feature 54 automatic heating 53 folding in and out 53 tilting down passenger-side

mirror 54 External audio device 117 Eye for tow-starting and

towing, refer to Tow fitting 229

Eyes for lashing, refer to Securing cargo 128

F "Fader", refer to Tone

control 160 Fader, refer to Tone

control 160 Failure messages, refer to

Check Control 79 False alarm refer to Avoiding

unintentional alarms 36 refer to Switching off

alarm 35 Fastening safety belts, refer to

Safety belts 52 Fastest route for

navigation 144 Fast forward CD changer 176 CD player 176 "Fast route" for

navigation 144 "Favorites", calling up with

radio 166 Filler neck for washer fluid 65 Filter, refer to Microfilter/

activated-charcoal filter 112 Fine wood, refer to Caring for

your vehicle brochure First aid, refer to First-aid

kit 228

First-aid kit 228 Flashing when locking and

unlocking, refer to Setting confirmation signals 31

Flashlight, refer to Rechargeable flashlight 117

Flat tire Flat Tire Monitor 89 run-flat tires 90, 92, 214 Tire Pressure Monitor 90 warning lamp 90, 92 Flat Tire Monitor 89 false alarms 89 initializing system 89 limits of system 89 snow chains 215 warning lamp 90 Floor mats, refer to Caring for

your vehicle brochure Floor mats/carpets, refer to

Caring for your vehicle brochure

Fluid reservoir, refer to Filler neck for washer fluid 65

"FM", reception range 158, 162

FM, waveband 162 Fog lamps 106 indicator lamp 13, 106 Folding into raised position

convertible top compartment floor, Convertible 35

Footbrake, refer to Braking safely 126

Footwell lighting, refer to Interior lamps 106

For specified oil grades, refer to Approved engine oils 219

For your own safety 6 Freeway, refer to Route

criteria 144 Front airbags 94 Front passenger airbags,

deactivating 94 "FTM" 89 FTM, refer to Flat Tire

Monitor 89

R e

fe re

n ce

249

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Fuel average consumption 75 display 75 fuel specifications 209 high-quality brands 209 quality 209 specifications 209 tank contents, refer to

Capacities 237 Fuel display, refer to Fuel

gauge 75 Fuel-efficient driving 124 Fuel filler door 208 releasing in the event of

electrical malfunction 208 Fuel gauge 75 Full mobile phone preparation

package 184 Full screen display, refer to

Switching assistance window off 20

"Full screen" with BMW Night Vision 100

Fuses 226

G Garage-door opener, refer to

Integrated universal remote control 115

Gasoline refer to Average fuel

consumption 75 refer to Fuel

specifications 209 refer to Required fuel 209 Gasoline display, refer to Fuel

gauge 75 Gearshift lever, manual

transmission 60 General driving

notes 124, 125 Glass sunroof, electric with

raise function 40 convenient operation 32 convenient operation with

comfort access 37 moving manually 41 remote control 31

Glove compartment 116 rechargeable flashlight 117 GPS navigation, refer to

Navigation system 132 Grills, refer to Ventilation 112 Gross vehicle weight, refer to

Weights 237

H Handbrake 60 indicator lamp 13, 60 Hands-free system, refer to

Microphone 14 Hazard warning flashers 15 "HD radio" 166 HD radio, refer to High

Definition Radio 166 Head airbags 94 Headlamp control,

automatic 102 Headlamp flasher 63 Headlamps care, refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure cleaning, refer to Wiper

system 64 cleaning tank, refer to

Capacities 237 filler neck for washer

fluid 217 replacing bulbs 223 Head Light, refer to Adaptive

Head Light 104 Head restraints active front head

restraints 50 front 50 sitting safely 47 "Head-Up Display" 97 Head-Up Display 96 Heated mirrors 53 rear window 110 seats 53 steering wheel 54 Heater 109

Heating exterior mirrors 53 interior 108 rear window 110 residual heat utilization 112 seats 53 steering wheel 54 Heating with engine switched

off, refer to Residual heat 112

Heavy cargo, refer to Securing cargo 128

Height, refer to Dimensions 235

Height adjustment seats 48 steering wheel 54 High-beam assistant 104 High beams 104 headlamp flasher 104 indicator lamp 13 High Definition Radio 166 High water, refer to Driving

through water 126 Hills 126 Holder for cups 118 "Home address" for

navigation system 144 Homepage of BMW 4 Hood 216 Horn 10 Hotel function 33 unlocking manually 33 Hot exhaust system 125 "Hour memo" 83 "House number" for

destination entry 137 Hydraulic brake assistant,

refer to Brake assistant 87 Hydroplaning 125 also refer to Minimum tread

depth 213

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

250

I IBOC, refer to High Definition

Radio 166 Ice, refer to Outside

temperature warning 74 ID3-Tag, refer to Information

about track 174 Identification mark recommended tire

brands 215 run-flat tires 214 tire coding 212 iDrive 16 adjusting brightness 83 assistance window 20 changing date and time 82 changing language 84 changing menu page 19 changing settings 82 changing units of measure

and display form 84 controller 16 controls 16 displays, menus 17 operating principle 17 selecting menu item 19 selecting or confirming

entry 19 start menu 17 status information 20 symbols 18 Ignition 58 switched off 59 switched on 58 Ignition key, refer to Keys/

remote control 28 Ignition key position 1, refer to

Radio readiness 58 Ignition key position 2, refer to

Ignition on 58 Ignition lock 58 starting engine with comfort

access 38 i menu 17 Imprint 2

Indicator/warning lamps ABS Antilock Brake

System 88 active steering 93 airbags 95 brake system 88 DSC 13, 87 DTC 13, 88 Flat Tire Monitor 90 fog lamps 13, 106 handbrake 13, 60 safety belt warning 52 TPM Tire Pressure

Monitor 92 Indicator and warning lamps,

overview 13 Inflation pressure, refer to Tire

inflation pressure 210 Inflation pressure monitoring refer to Flat Tire Monitor 89 refer to Tire Pressure

Monitor 90 Info menu 17 Information on another location 140 on current position 140 on town/city of

destination 140 "Information" for navigation

system 140 Information menu, refer to

i menu 17 "Information on

destination" 141 "Info sources" 77 Initializing Flat Tire Monitor 89 radio, refer to Storing

stations 164 refer to Power failure 226 seat, mirror and steering

wheel memory 49 time and date 82 "Input map" 139 Installation location CD changer 176 drive for navigation DVD 132

Instructions for navigation system, refer to Voice instructions 149

Instrument cluster 12 Instrument illumination, refer

to Instrument lighting 106 Instrument lighting 106 Instrument panel, refer to

Cockpit 10 Instrument panel, refer to

Instrument cluster 12 Integrated key 28 Integrated universal remote

control 115 Interesting destination for

navigation 140 "Interim time" 82 Interior lamps 106 switching on with remote

control 31 Interior motion sensor 36 switching off 36 Interior rearview mirror,

automatic dimming feature 54

Intermittent wiper mode 64

J Jacking points 225 Joystick, refer to iDrive 16 Jump starting 228

K Keyless-Go, refer to Comfort

access 36 Keyless opening and closing,

refer to Comfort access 36 Key Memory, refer to Personal

Profile 29 "Keypad" 194 Keys 28 key-related settings, refer to

Personal Profile 29 spare key 28 Kick-down, Sport automatic

transmission 61

R e

fe re

n ce

251

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Knee airbags 94 Knock control 209

L Lamps refer to High-beam

assistant 104 refer to Parking lamps/low

beams 102 Lamps and bulbs 223 Lane limit lines, refer to

Leaving lane warning 101 "Language / Units" 84 for navigation

system 133, 149 "Languages" 84 for navigation

system 133, 149 Lashing eyes, refer to

Securing cargo 128 Last destinations, refer to

Destination list 141 "Last seat pos." 50 LATCH child restraint fixing

system 56 Leaving lane warning 101 LEDs light-emitting

diodes 223 Length, refer to

Dimensions 235 License plate lamps, replacing

bulbs 225 Light-emitting diodes

LEDs 223 Lighter 119 "Lighting" 64, 103 Lighting instruments 106 lamps and bulbs 223 of the vehicle, refer to

Lamps 102 Light switch 102 "Limit" 81 Loading, refer to Cargo

loading 127 Load securing equipment,

refer to Securing cargo 128

"Lock after driving" 33 Lock buttons in the doors,

refer to Locking 33 Locking 31 confirmation signals 31 from inside 33 from outside 31 without key, refer to Comfort

access 36 Locking and unlocking doors confirmation signals 31 from inside 32 from outside 30 Low beams 102 automatic 102 replacing bulbs 224 Lower back support, refer to

Lumbar support 48 Luggage compartment capacity 237 emergency release 35 hotel function 33 increasing capacity,

Convertible 35 opening/closing, refer to

Luggage compartment lid 34

opening from inside 34 opening from outside 34 opening with remote

control 31 Luggage compartment lid 34 comfort access 37 emergency operation 34 emergency release 35 opening from inside 34 opening from outside 34 opening with remote

control 31, 34 unlocking manually 34 Lumbar support 48 LW, waveband 162

M M+S tires, refer to Winter

tires 215 Maintenance 221 refer to Service and

Warranty Information Booklet for US models 221

refer to Service requirements 77

refer to Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models 221

Maintenance system 221 Malfunction convertible top 43 door lock 32 driver's door 32 fuel filler door 208 glass sunroof 41 hotel function 33 luggage compartment lid 34 Malfunction warnings, refer to

Check Control 79 Manual air distribution 110 "Manual" on the radio 163 Manual operation convertible top 43 door lock 32 driver's door 32 fuel filler door 208 glass sunroof 41 hotel function 33 luggage compartment lid 34 transmission lock, sport

automatic transmission 62 Manual transmission 60 "Map direction of travel" 148 "Map facing north" 148 Map for navigation changing scale 148 destination entry 139 Map view 148 Map view facing north 148 Master key, refer to Keys/

remote control 28 Maximum cooling 111

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

252

Maximum speed with winter tires 215

Measurements, refer to Dimensions

Convertible 236 Coupe 235 Memory, refer to Seat, mirror

and steering wheel memory 49

MENU, button refer to Start menu 17

Menus, refer to iDrive 16 Message list for traffic

information 151 Microfilter 112 Microphone for mobile phone 14 for voice command

system 14 Mirror dimming feature 54 Mirrors 53 automatic curb monitor 54 folding in and out 53 heating 53 memory, refer to Seat, mirror

and steering wheel memory 49

"Missed calls" 192 Missed calls 193 Mobile phone accepted calls 193 adjusting volume 190 calling 191 ending call 191 installation location, refer to

Center armrest 117 missed calls 193 operation by voice 195 operation via iDrive 190 redialing 193 refer to separate operating

instructions Top 8 193 touch tone dialing, refer to

Tone dialing method 194 Mobile phone battery 198

Mobile Service, refer to Roadside Assistance 228

Monitor, refer to iDrive 16 Monitoring pressure of tires,

refer to Flat Tire Monitor 89 "Monitor on / off" 55 Most recent mobile phone

numbers 193 MP3 compressed audio files 172 USB/audio interface 179 Multifunction steering wheel,

refer to Buttons on steering wheel 11

Multifunction switch refer to Turn signals/

headlamp flasher 63 refer to Wiper system 64 Music tracks random play sequence 175 sampling, scan 174 "Mute on / off" 55 "M View" 97 MW, waveband 162

N "Navigation" 76, 134 Navigation destination entering manually 134 selecting via map 139 Navigation drive, installation

location 132 Navigation DVD 132 Navigation instructions, refer

to Switching voice instructions on/off 149

Navigation system 132 address book 142 bypassing route

sections 150 destination entry 134 destination guidance in

assistance window 132 destination list 141 displaying current

position 153 displaying route 147 entering a destination

manually 134 entering destination via

voice 137 last destinations 141 looking for interesting

destination 140 navigation DVD 132 route list 149 selecting destination using

information 140 selecting destination via

map 139 selecting route criteria 144 starting destination

guidance 146 switching off, refer to

Terminating/continuing destination guidance 146

terminating/continuing destination guidance 146

voice instructions 149 volume adjustment 150 "Navigation voice

instructions" 55, 149 Neck support, refer to Front

head restraints 50 "New address" for navigation

system 142 "New destination" 134, 139 New remote controls 28 "New route" 150 New wheels and tires 214 "Next entertainment

source" 55 Night Vision, refer to

BMW Night Vision 98

R e

fe re

n ce

253

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

"Night Vision off" 100 "Night Vision on / off" 55 Nozzles refer to Ventilation 112 refer to Windshield washer

nozzles 65 Nylon rope, refer to Tow-

starting and towing 229

O OBD socket, refer to Socket

for OBD Onboard Diagnostics interface 222

Octane ratings, refer to Fuel specifications 209

Odometer 74 Oil, refer to Engine oil 218 Oil change interval refer to Service and

Warranty Information Booklet for US models or Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models

refer to Service requirements 77

"On a new destination" for navigation system 140

"Onboard info" 76 Onboard monitor, refer to

iDrive 16 Onboard tool kit 223 "On destination" 140 "On location" 140 Opening and closing comfort access 36 from inside 32 from outside 30 using door lock 32 using the remote control 30 Operating principle, iDrive 17

Operation by voice for mobile phone 195

adjusting volume 196 canceling 195 commands 195 correcting phone

number 196 dialing phone number 196 placing a call 196 redialing 197 voice phone book 196 "Options" 203 Orientation menu, refer to

Start menu 17 Output, refer to Engine

data 234 Outside air, refer to AUC

Automatic recirculated-air control 111

Outside temperature display 74

changing unit of measure 84 Overview operating principle 17 radio control 158 screen display 20

P Panic mode 31 Park Distance Control PDC 85 "Parked car operation" 113 "Parked car ventilation" 113 Parked car ventilation activating activation

times 114 LED 108 setting activation time 113 switching on and off

directly 113 Parking, vehicle 59 Parking aid, refer to PDC Park

Distance Control 85 Parking assistant, refer to

PDC Park Distance Control 85

Parking brake, refer to Handbrake 60

Parking lamps 102 replacing bulbs 224 Parts and accessories 6 Passenger-side exterior

mirror, tilting down 54 "Pathway lighting" 103 Pathway lighting 103 "PDC" 86 "PDC display on" 86 PDC Park Distance Control 85 Personal Profile 29 "Perspective" 148 "Phone" 186, 188, 191 Phone book 190 changing entry 192 creating and editing voice

phone book 196 deleting all entries 193 deleting entry 193 dialing phone number 192 Phone numbers deleting from phone

book 193 dialing 191 most recent numbers 193 selecting in phone book 193 Top 8 193 Pinch protection system glass sunroof 41 power windows 40 Plasters, refer to First-aid

kit 228 "Play" on the radio 170 Plugging unit for remote

control, refer to Ignition lock 58

Pollen, refer to Microfilter/ activated-charcoal filter 112

Position refer to Displaying current

position 153 refer to Storing current

position 142 Power failure 226 Power windows, refer to

Windows 38 "Presets" on the

radio 162, 170

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

254

Presetting parked car ventilation activation times 113

Pressure, tires 210 Pressure monitoring of tires,

refer to TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 90

"Profile" 205 Programmable buttons on

steering wheel 55 Programmable memory

buttons 21 Protective function, refer to

Pinch protection system glass sunroof 41 windows 40

R Radiator fluid, refer to

Coolant 219 Radio Autostore 164 controls 158 High Definition Radio 166 sampling stations 163 satellite radio 169 selecting frequency

manually 163 selecting

waveband 158, 162 station search 163 station selection 162 station with best

reception 164 storing stations 164 switching on/off 158 tone control 159 volume 159 Weather Band, refer to

Weather news flashes 166 Radio key, refer to Keys/

remote control 28 Radio position, refer to Radio

readiness 58

Radio readiness 58 switched off 59 switched on 58 with comfort access 37 Radio stations, storing 164 Rain sensor, windshield wiper

system 64 "Random", random play

sequence 175 "Random all" in audio

mode 176 "Random directory" in audio

mode 175 Random play sequence CD changer 175 CD player 175 "RDS" 165 Reading lamps 107 Rear lamps, refer to Tail

lamps 224 Rearview mirrors, refer to

Mirrors 53 Rear window heating 110 opening and closing 39 "Received calls" 192 Reception quality 165 radio stations 165 regional station 164 Reception quality of mobile

phone, refer to Status information 20

Rechargeable flashlight 117 Recirculated-air mode, refer

to AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 111

Recirculation of air, refer to AUC Automatic recirculated-air control 111

Reclining seat, refer to Seats 48

Recording times, refer to Stopwatch 82

"Redial" for mobile phone 192 Redialing with mobile

phone 197

Reflectors, refer to Tail lamps 224

Refueling 208 Releasing hood 216 locks, refer to Unlocking 37 "Relock door if not

opened" 33 Remaining distance, refer to

Cruising range 75 Remaining distance to

destination, refer to Computer 76

Remote control 28 battery replacement 38 comfort access 36 garage-door opener 115 luggage compartment lid 31 malfunction 31, 38 Removing condensation from

windows 110 "Repeat directory" in audio

mode 175 "Repeat" in audio mode 175 "Repeat track" in audio

mode 175 Replacement fuses 226 Replacement remote control,

refer to New remote controls 28

Replacing bulbs, refer to Lamps and bulbs 223

Replacing tires, changing a wheel 225

Reporting safety defects 7 Required fuel 209 Reserve warning, refer to Fuel

gauge 75 "Reset" 90, 91 stopwatch 82 tone settings 161 Reset, refer to Resetting tone

settings 161 Residual heat 112 Restraint systems for children 56 refer to Safety belts 52

R e

fe re

n ce

255

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Retreaded tires 214 Reverse, fast CD changer 176 CD player 176 Reverse gear manual transmission 60 Sport automatic

transmission 61 Road map 148 "Roadside

Assistance" 194, 200 Roadside Assistance 228 Roadside assistance 200 Roadside parking lamps 104 replacing bulbs, refer to

Parking lamps 224 Rollover protection system on

Convertible 96 lowering 96 Rope, refer to Tow-starting

and towing 229 Rotary/pushbutton, refer to

iDrive 16 Route 144 bypassing sections 150 changing 150 changing criteria 144 display 147 displaying arrow display 147 displaying map view 148 displaying streets or towns/

cities 149 selecting 144 Route information, refer to

Destination guidance with voice instructions 149

Route map, refer to Displaying map view 148

"Route preference", changing 144

Route selection 144 RSC Run-flat System

Component, refer to Run- flat tires 214

Rubber parts, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Run-flat System Component RSC, refer to Run-flat tires 214

Run-flat tires 214 continuing driving with a

damaged tire 90, 92 flat tire 90, 92 Flat Tire Monitor 89 tire inflation pressure 210 Tire Pressure Monitor 90 tire replacement 214, 215 winter tires 215

S Safety belts 52 damage 53 indicator lamp 52 refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure reminder 52 sitting safely 47 Safety belt tensioners, refer to

Safety belts 52 Safety systems ABS Antilock Brake

System 86 airbags 94 driving stability control

systems 86 rollover protection system,

Convertible 96 safety belts 52 Safety tires, refer to Run-flat

tires 214 Satellite radio 169 enabling channels 169 selecting channel 170 storing channel 170 "SAT" with radio 158, 169 "Save current

destination" 144 "Scan" music tracks on CD 174 stations with radio 163 Scan CD changer 174 CD player 174 radio 163 "Scan all" in audio mode 174 "Scan directory" in audio

mode 174

Screw thread for tow fitting 230

SDARS, refer to Satellite radio 169

Seats 48 adjusting 48 heating 53 lumbar support 48 memory, refer to Seat, mirror

and steering wheel memory 49

sitting safely 47 sports seat 48 storing the setting 49 thigh support 48 Securing cargo 128 ski bag 120 "Select as

destination" 140, 203 "Select current speed" 81 Selecting audio sources, refer

to Operating via iDrive 158 Selecting distance with active

cruise control 69 Selecting frequency

manually 163 Selecting menu items 19 Selecting route 144 Selection options with

navigation system 144 Selector lever, manual

transmission 60 "Service" 77, 201, 218 Service, refer to Roadside

Assistance 228 Service and Warranty

Information Booklet for US models 221

Service Interval Display refer to CBS Condition

Based Service 221 refer to Service

requirements 77 "Service notification" 201 "Service Request" 194, 201 "Service

requirements" 78, 201, 218

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

256

Service requirements 77 refer to CBS Condition

Based Service 221 "Service Status" 205 "Set" in audio mode 158 in trip computer 77 "Set date" 83 "Set service date" 78 "Set time" 83 Setting button, refer to

Controls, controller 16 "Settings" 205 for BMW Assist 203 for unlocking 30 Settings BMW Night Vision 100 changing on Control

Display 82 clock, 12h/24h mode 83 configuring, refer to

Personal Profile 29 date 83 language 84 units of measure 84 Settings menu, refer to

i menu 17 Setting time, refer to

Preselecting activation time 113

Shifting, Sport automatic transmission 61

Short commands of voice command system 238

"Short route" for navigation 144

Short route in navigation, refer to Selecting route 144

"Show current position" 139 "Show destination

position" 139 Side airbags 94 Side turn signals, replacing

bulbs 224 Signal horn, refer to Horn 10 Signaling a turn, triple turn

signal activation 64 Sill panel lighting, refer to

Interior lamps 106

Sitting safely 47 with airbags 47 with head restraints 47 with safety belts 47 Ski bag 119 Sliding/tilt roof, refer to Glass

sunroof, electric with raise function 40

Slope assistant, refer to Starting assistant 88

Snap-in adapter mounting/removing 197 using 184 Snow chains 215 Socket, refer to Connecting

electrical devices 119 Socket for Onboard

Diagnostics interface 222 Socket for remote control,

refer to Ignition lock 58 Soft closure aid, refer to

Automatic soft closing 34 Song search with CD, refer to

Sampling tracks, scan 174 SOS, refer to Initiating an

emergency request 227 Spare adapter for spare key 28 fuses 226 key 28 Special oils, refer to Approved

engine oils 219 Speed-dependent

volume 160 Speed limit warning, refer to

Speed limit 81 Speedometer 12 "Speed volume", refer to Tone

control 160 Speed with winter tires 215 Sport automatic

transmission 60 Dynamic Driving Control 62 kick-down 61 releasing transmission

lock 62 towing 230, 231 with comfort access 38

Sport program in the Sport automatic transmission 61

Stability control, refer to Driving stability control systems 86

"Star button" 55 Start/Stop button 58 starting the engine 59 switching off the engine 59 "Start" for stopwatch 82 "Start guidance" 137, 146 Starting assistant 88 Starting difficulties, refer to

Jump starting 228 Starting engine 59 Starting off on slopes, refer to

Starting assistant 88 Start menu, iDrive 17 "Start route guidance" 139 "Start service" 201 "Start Service" for

BMW Assist 202 "State / Province" for

destination entry 135 "State inspection" 78 Station, refer to Radio 162 "Status" 78 Status information on Control

Display 20 Status of this Owner's Manual

at time of printing 5 Steering wheel adjustment 54 automatic adjustment, refer

to Easy entry/exit 54 automatic adjustment, refer

to Steering wheel memory 49

buttons on steering wheel 11

heating 54 lock, refer to Ignition lock 58 memory 49 programmable buttons 55 "Steering wheel buttons" 55 Steering with variable ratio,

refer to Active steering 93 Steptronic, refer to Sport

automatic transmission 60

R e

fe re

n ce

257

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

"Stop" for stopwatch 82 "Stopwatch" 82 Stopwatch 82 Storage compartments 117 "Store in address book" for

navigation system 142 "Store" on the radio 164, 171 Storing current position 142 Storing sitting position, refer

to Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory 49

Storing tires 215 "Street" for destination

entry 136 Summer tires, refer to Wheels

and tires 210 "Surround Settings", refer to

Tone control 160 SW, waveband 162 Switches, refer to Cockpit 10 Switching automatically

between high beams and low beams, refer to High- beam assistant 104

Switching on audio 158 CD changer 158 CD player 158 radio 158 Swiveling headlamps, refer to

Adaptive Head Light 104 Symbols 4 indicator and warning

lamps 13 navigation system 152 status information 20 traffic information with

navigation system 150

T Tachometer 74 Tail lamps 224 replacing bulbs 224 Tank capacity also refer to Capacities 237 fuel tank capacity 208 Target cursor for

navigation 139

Technical alterations, refer to For your own safety 6

Technical data 234 Telematics, refer to

BMW Assist 199 Telephone installation location, refer to

Center armrest 117 refer to Mobile phone 184 refer to separate operating

instructions "Telephone list" 55 TeleService 201 Temperature adjusting in upper body

region 110 adjusting with automatic

climate control 109 changing units of

measure 84 refer to Coolant

temperature 74 Temperature display changing units of

measure 84 outside temperature 74 outside temperature

warning 74 Temperature gauge, engine

oil 75 Tempomat, refer to Cruise

control 65 "Terminate services" 204 "Text language" 84 "Theater", refer to Tone

control 161 The individual vehicle 5 Tie-down points, refer to

Securing cargo 128 Tilt alarm sensor 36 switching off 36 Tilting down passenger-side

exterior mirror 54 "Time" 83 "Time / Date" 82 "Time format" 83 Timer, refer to Preselecting

activation time 113

"Timer 1" for parked-car ventilation 113

"Timer 2" for parked-car ventilation 113

Tire inflation pressure 210 Tire pressure loss 90, 91 Tire Pressure Monitor

TPM 90 Tire Quality Grading 212 Tire replacement, new wheels

and tires 214 Tires age 212 air loss 90, 92 breaking-in 124 condition 213 damage 213 inflation pressure 210 minimum tread depth 213 monitoring inflation

pressure, refer to Flat Tire Monitor 89

new wheels and tires 214 pressure monitoring, refer to

Tire Pressure Monitor 90 replacing 214 retreaded tires 214 run-flat tires 214 size 211 size, refer to The right

wheels and tires 214 wear indicators 213 wheel/tire combination 214 winter tires 215 with run-flat properties, refer

to Run-flat tires 214 TMC station, refer to Traffic

information 150 "Tone" 159 Tone dialing method 194 Tone in audio mode adjusting 159 middle setting 161 Tone on locking/unlocking 31 Tools, refer to Onboard tool

kit 223 Top 42 "Top 8" for mobile phone 192

E ve

ry th

in g

fr o

m A

to Z

258

Torque, refer to Engine data 234

Touch tone dialing, refer to Tone dialing method 194

Tow bar 230 Tow fitting 229 Towing 229 methods 230 tow fittings 229 with manual

transmission 230 with Sport automatic

transmission 230 "Town / City" for destination

entry 135 Tow rope 231 Tow-starting 229 "TPM" 91 TPM Tire Pressure

Monitor 90 resetting system 91 system limits 91 warning lamp 92 Tracks finding 174 random sequence 175 sampling on CD 174 selecting with CD 173 Track width, refer to

Dimensions 235 Traction-assist feature, refer

to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 87

Traction control, refer to DSC Dynamic Stability Control 87

Traffic congestion displaying traffic

information 150 refer to Bypassing route

sections 150 Traffic information for

navigation 150 depiction in route map 152 displaying 151 during destination

guidance 153 symbols 152

"Traffic Info settings" 151 Transmission manual transmission 60 sport automatic

transmission 60 starting assistant 88 towing 230 transmission lock, manually

locking and unlocking, sport automatic transmission 62

Transporting children safely 56

Transport securing device, refer to Securing cargo 128

Tread depth, refer to Minimum tread depth 213

Treble, refer to Tone control 159

"Treble", tone control 159 "Trip computer" 77 Trip computer 76 Trip-distance counter refer to Trip computer 76 refer to Trip meter 74 "Triple turn signal" 64 Trip meter, also refer to Trip

computer 76 Trip odometer 74 Trunk, refer to Luggage

compartment 35 Trunk lid, refer to Luggage

compartment lid 34 Turning circle, refer to

Dimensions 235 Turn signals 63

U Undercarriage protection,

refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Uniform Tire Quality Grading/ UTQR 212

"Units" 84 Units average fuel

consumption 84 temperature 84

Universal garage-door opener, refer to Integrated universal remote control 115

Universal remote control, refer to Integrated universal remote control 115

"Unlock button" 30 Unlocking from inside 33 from outside 30 without key, refer to Comfort

access 36 "Update services" 203 USB/audio interface 179 "USB" in audio mode 180 "Use current location as

address" 142, 144 Used batteries refer to Disposal 225 refer to Replacing battery 38 Using turn signals 63

V Vehicle battery 225 breaking-in 124 care, refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure cargo loading 127 measurements, refer to

Dimensions 235 parking 59 washing, refer to Caring for

your vehicle brochure weights 237 "Vehicle / Tires" for

unlocking 30 Vehicle jack 225 jacking points 225 Vehicle position, refer to

Displaying current position 153

Ventilation 112 draft-free 112 for cooling 112 parked car ventilation 112

R e

fe re

n ce

259

A t

a g

la n

ce C

o n

tr o

ls D

ri vi

n g

t ip

s C

om m

un ic

at io

ns N

a vi

g a

ti o

n E

n te

rt a

in m

e n

t M

o b

il it

y

Vent outlets of automatic climate control 108

"Vent settings" 111 Viscosity 219 Voice, refer to Destination

guidance with voice instructions 149

Voice command system overview 23 short commands 238 Voice instructions for

navigation system 149 muting 55 repeating 55, 150 switching on/off 55, 149 volume 150 Voice phone book 196 Volume 158 audio sources 158 fuel tank, refer to

Capacities 237 luggage compartment 237 mobile phone 190 setting speed-

dependent 160 voice instructions 150 windshield cleaning system,

refer to Capacities 237 Volume adjustment in audio

mode front-to-rear 160 right/left 160

W Warning lamps, refer to

Indicator and warning lamps 13

Warning messages, refer to Check Control 79

Warning on leaving lane, refer to Leaving lane warning 101

Warning triangle 228 Warranty and Service Guide

Booklet for Canadian models 221

Washer fluid capacity of the reservoir 65 wiper system 65

Washing the vehicle, also refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Water on roads, refer to Driving through water 126

Waveband for radio 162 "WB" 158, 166 Wear indicators in tires, refer

to Minimum tread depth 213 Weather news flashes 166 Website BMW 4 Weights 237 Welcome lamps 102 Wheel/tire combination, refer

to New wheels and tires 214 Wheel/tire damage 213 Wheel/tire replacement, refer

to New wheels and tires 214 Wheelbase, refer to

Dimensions 235 Wheels and tires 210 Width, refer to

Dimensions 235 Wind deflector 45 Windows 38 comfort closing with comfort

access 37 convenient operation 31, 32 opening and closing,

Convertible 39 opening and closing,

Coupe 38 rear window, Convertible 39 Windshield cleaning, refer to Wiper

system 64 defrosting, refer to

Defrosting windows 110 displays, refer to Head-Up

Display 96 Windshield wash automatic, refer to Rain

sensor 64 capacities, reservoir 237 filler neck for washer

fluid 217 nozzles 65 washer fluid 65 wiper system 64

Windshield wipers, refer to Washer system, replacing wiper blades 223

Windshield wipers, refer to Wiper system 64

care, refer to Caring for your vehicle brochure

Winter tires 215 setting speed limit 81 storage 215 Wiper blades care, refer to Caring for your

vehicle brochure replacing 223 Wiper system 64 rain sensor 64 washer fluid 65 windshield washer

nozzles 65 "With highways" for

navigation system 144 Wood decoration, refer to

Caring for your vehicle brochure

Word matching principle for navigation 145

Working in the engine compartment 216

Wrenches/screwdrivers, refer to Onboard tool kit 223

X Xenon lamps 224 replacing bulbs 224

Y Your individual vehicle programmable buttons on

steering wheel 55 settings, refer to Personal

Profile 29

Z "Zoom" with BMW Night

Vision 100

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the 6 Series BMW works, you can view and download the BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for BMW 6 Series as well as other BMW manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a BMW 6 Series. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the BMW 650i Coupe 6 Series 2008 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.